Planning Guide PMP450i Cambium

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 237

Cambium

PMP 450 Planning Guide


System Release 13.4
PMP 450 Planning Guide

PMP 450 module essential information

Default IP Address for Management


169.254.1.1
GUI Access

Default Administrator Username admin

Default Administrator Password (no password)

See “Updating the software version and


Software Upgrade Procedure using CNUT” in the PMP 450
Configuration and User Guide

1. On the radio GUI, navigate to


Configuration, Unit Settings and
select Set to Factory Defaults

OR

2. On the radio GUI, navigate to


Resetting to Factory Defaults (2 Configuration, Unit Settings and
options) enable and save option Set to
Factory Defaults Upon Default
Plug Detection. When the unit is
powered on with a default/override
plug (see section “Acquiring the
Override Plug” in the PMP 450
Configuration and User Guide) the
radio is returned to its factory default
settings.

ii pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Cambium
Networks assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or
from use of the information obtained herein. Cambium reserves the right to make changes to
any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right
to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no
obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Cambium does not assume any liability
arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or circuit described herein;
neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others. It is possible that
this publication may contain references to, or information about Cambium products (machines
and programs), programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such
references or information must not be construed to mean that Cambium intends to announce
such Cambium products, programming, or services in your country.
Copyrights
This document, Cambium products, and 3rd Party Software products described in this
document may include or describe copyrighted Cambium and other 3rd Party supplied
computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United
States and other countries preserve for Cambium, its licensors, and other 3rd Party supplied
software certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive right to copy,
reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material.
Accordingly, any copyrighted material of Cambium, its licensors, or the 3rd Party software
supplied material contained in the Cambium products described in this document may not be
copied, reproduced, reverse engineered, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without
the express written permission of Cambium. Furthermore, the purchase of Cambium products
shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any
license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Cambium or other 3rd Party
supplied software, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by
operation of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is
prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted,
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language,
in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Cambium.
License Agreements
The software described in this document is the property of Cambium and its licensors. It is
furnished by express license agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the
terms of such an agreement.
High Risk Materials
Components, units, or 3rd Party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-
tolerant and are NOT designed, manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment
in the following hazardous environments requiring fail-safe controls: the operation of Nuclear
Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life
Support, or Weapons Systems (High Risk Activities). Cambium and its supplier(s) specifically
disclaim any expressed or implied warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.
© 2015 Cambium Networks, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) iii


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Safety and regulatory information


This section describes important safety and regulatory guidelines that must be observed by
personnel installing or operating PMP 450 equipment.

Important safety information

To prevent loss of life or physical injury, observe the safety guidelines in this
section.

Power lines
Exercise extreme care when working near power lines.

Working at heights
Exercise extreme care when working at heights.

Grounding and protective earth


PMP 450 units must be properly grounded to protect against lightning. It is the user’s
responsibility to install the equipment in accordance with national regulations. In the USA,
follow Section 810 of the National Electric Code, ANSI/NFPA No.70-1984 (USA). In
Canada, follow Section 54 of the Canadian Electrical Code. These codes describe correct
installation procedures for grounding the outdoor unit, mast, lead-in wire and discharge
unit, size of grounding conductors and connection requirements for grounding electrodes.
Other regulations may apply in different countries and therefore it is recommended that
installation of the outdoor unit be contracted to a professional installer.

Powering down before servicing


Always power down and unplug the equipment before servicing.

Primary disconnect device


The AP or SM unit’s power supply is the primary disconnect device.

External cables
Safety may be compromised if outdoor rated cables are not used for connections that are
exposed to the outdoor environment.

iv pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

RF exposure near the antenna


Radio frequency (RF) fields are present close to the antenna when the transmitter is on.
Always turn off the power to the PMP 450 unit before undertaking maintenance activities
in front of the antenna.

Minimum separation distances


Install the AP/SM so as to provide and maintain the minimum separation distances from all
persons.
The minimum separation distances for each frequency variant are specified in Calculated
distances and power compliance margins on page 4-15.

Important regulatory information


The PMP 450 product is certified as an unlicensed device in frequency bands where it is
not allowed to cause interference to licensed services (called primary users of the bands).

Radar avoidance
In countries where radar systems are the primary band users, the regulators have
mandated special requirements to protect these systems from interference caused by
unlicensed devices. Unlicensed devices must detect and avoid co-channel operation with
radar systems.
Installers and users must meet all local regulatory requirements for radar detection. To
meet these requirements, users must set the correct Country Code during commissioning
of the PMP 450. If this is not done, installers and users may be liable to civil and criminal
penalties.
Contact the Cambium helpdesk if more guidance is required.

USA and Canada specific information


The USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has asked manufacturers to
implement special features to prevent interference to radar systems that operate in the
5250-5350 and 5470-5725 MHz bands. These features must be implemented in all
products able to operate outdoors in the UNII band. The use of the 5600 – 5650 MHz band
is prohibited, even with detect-and-avoid functionality implemented.
Manufacturers must ensure that such radio products cannot be configured to operate
outside of FCC rules; specifically it must not be possible to disable or modify the radar
protection functions that have been demonstrated to the FCC.
In order to comply with these FCC requirements, Cambium supplies variants of the PMP
450 for operation in the USA or Canada. These variants are only allowed to operate with
Country Codes that comply with FCC/IC rule.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) v


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Contents
PMP 450 module essential information ....................................................................................... ii
Safety and regulatory information .................................................................................. iv
Important safety information ................................................................................................ iv
Important regulatory information .......................................................................................... v
About This Planning Guide ............................................................................................ xiv
General information ................................................................................................................... xv
Version information ............................................................................................................. xv
Contacting Cambium Networks .......................................................................................... xvi
Problems and warranty ............................................................................................................ xvii
Security advice.......................................................................................................................... xix
Warnings, cautions, and notes ................................................................................................... xx
Chapter 1: Product description .................................................................................. 1-1
Overview of PMP 450 ................................................................................................................ 1-2
Purpose ............................................................................................................................... 1-2
Key features ........................................................................................................................ 1-2
Typical deployment ............................................................................................................. 1-3
System components ............................................................................................................ 1-4
Access Point (AP) ...................................................................................................................... 1-6
Network connection .......................................................................................................... 1-11
AP power supply ............................................................................................................... 1-11
Further reading on the AP ................................................................................................ 1-11
Subscriber Module (SM) ......................................................................................................... 1-12
Mounting brackets ............................................................................................................ 1-12
Network connection .......................................................................................................... 1-12
SM power supply .............................................................................................................. 1-12
Further reading on the SM ............................................................................................... 1-13
Cabling and lightning protection ............................................................................................ 1-18
PMP and lightning protection ........................................................................................... 1-18
Outdoor connections ......................................................................................................... 1-18
Wireless operation .................................................................................................................. 1-19
Time division duplexing .................................................................................................... 1-19
OFDM and channel bandwidth ......................................................................................... 1-19
Link operation – Dynamic Rate Adapt............................................................................... 1-20
Adaptive modulation ......................................................................................................... 1-33
MIMO ................................................................................................................................ 1-33
Cyclic Prefix ...................................................................................................................... 1-33
Encryption ......................................................................................................................... 1-34
Further reading on wireless operation ............................................................................. 1-34
System management ............................................................................................................... 1-35

vi pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Management agent ........................................................................................................... 1-35


Web server ........................................................................................................................ 1-35
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) .................................................... 1-38
SNMP ................................................................................................................................ 1-39
Network Time Protocol (NTP) ........................................................................................... 1-39
Wireless Manager (WM) ................................................................................................... 1-39
Capacity upgrades ............................................................................................................ 1-40
Software upgrade .............................................................................................................. 1-41
Further reading on system management .......................................................................... 1-41
Chapter 2: Planning considerations ........................................................................... 2-1
Regulatory planning .................................................................................................................. 2-2
Obeying Regulatory limits ................................................................................................... 2-2
Conforming to the limits ..................................................................................................... 2-2
Network migration planning ..................................................................................................... 2-3
Example PMP 450 deployment scenario ............................................................................. 2-3
Sector capacity.................................................................................................................... 2-5
Site planning ........................................................................................................................... 2-12
AP or SM site selection ..................................................................................................... 2-12
Power supply site selection ............................................................................................... 2-12
Maximum cable lengths .................................................................................................... 2-12
Wind loading ..................................................................................................................... 2-13
Link planning .......................................................................................................................... 2-15
Range and obstacles ......................................................................................................... 2-15
Path loss considerations .................................................................................................... 2-46
Calculating maximum power level for connectorized units .............................................. 2-46
Understanding Attenuation ............................................................................................... 2-47
Calculating Link Loss ........................................................................................................ 2-47
Calculating Rx Signal Level .............................................................................................. 2-47
Calculating Fade Margin................................................................................................... 2-48
Analyzing the RF Environment ............................................................................................... 2-48
Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies .................................................................................. 2-48
Analyzing the spectrum..................................................................................................... 2-49
Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves ............................................................................ 2-50
Noting Possible Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone............................................................ 2-50
Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters .............................................................................. 2-51
Planning for co-location and using the OFDM Frame Calculator Tool ............................. 2-53
Selecting Sites for Network Elements .................................................................................... 2-57
Surveying Sites ................................................................................................................. 2-58
Clearing the Radio Horizon ............................................................................................... 2-58
Calculating the Aim Angles ............................................................................................... 2-59
Diagramming Network Layouts .............................................................................................. 2-60
Avoiding Self Interference ................................................................................................ 2-60
Avoiding Other Interference ............................................................................................. 2-61
Grounding and lightning protection........................................................................................ 2-62

pmp-0047 (August 2015) vii


PMP 450 Planning Guide

The need for power surge protection ............................................................................... 2-62


Standards .......................................................................................................................... 2-62
Lightning protection zones ............................................................................................... 2-63
General protection requirements...................................................................................... 2-64
Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation................................................. 2-65
Protection requirements for a wall installation ................................................................ 2-66
Protection requirements on a high rise building .............................................................. 2-67
Configuration options for TDD synchronization ..................................................................... 2-69
GPS synchronization ......................................................................................................... 2-70
Mounting the GPS receiver (CMM or UGPS) module on the equipment building............ 2-72
Mounting the GPS receiver (CMM or UGPS) module on a metal tower or mast .............. 2-72
Data network planning............................................................................................................ 2-73
Understanding addresses ................................................................................................. 2-73
Dynamic or static addressing............................................................................................ 2-73
DNS Client ........................................................................................................................ 2-73
Network Address Translation (NAT) ................................................................................. 2-74
Developing an IP addressing scheme ............................................................................... 2-75
Address Resolution Protocol ............................................................................................. 2-75
Allocating subnets ............................................................................................................. 2-76
Selecting non-routable IP addresses................................................................................. 2-76
Translation bridging ......................................................................................................... 2-76
Engineering VLANs ........................................................................................................... 2-77
Security planning .................................................................................................................... 2-81
Isolating APs from the Internet......................................................................................... 2-81
Managing module access by passwords ........................................................................... 2-81
Security Banner for AP and SM ........................................................................................ 2-86
Filtering protocols and ports ............................................................................................ 2-86
Port Configuration ............................................................................................................ 2-90
Isolating SMs .................................................................................................................... 2-90
Filtering management through Ethernet .......................................................................... 2-91
Allowing management from only specified IP addresses .................................................. 2-91
Configuring management IP by DHCP ............................................................................. 2-91
Planning for airlink security ............................................................................................. 2-91
Planning for RF Telnet Access Control ............................................................................. 2-92
Forwarding Downlink PPPoE PADI packets ..................................................................... 2-92
Planning for RADIUS integration ...................................................................................... 2-92
Planning for SNMP security.............................................................................................. 2-93
Ordering components ............................................................................................................. 2-94
PMP 450 component part numbers .................................................................................. 2-94
Chapter 3: Legal information ..................................................................................... 3-1
Cambium Networks end user license agreement ..................................................................... 3-2
Acceptance of this agreement............................................................................................. 3-2
Definitions ........................................................................................................................... 3-2
Grant of license ................................................................................................................... 3-2

viii pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Conditions of use ................................................................................................................. 3-2


Title and restrictions ........................................................................................................... 3-3
Confidentiality ..................................................................................................................... 3-4
Right to use Cambium’s name ............................................................................................ 3-4
Transfer ............................................................................................................................... 3-4
Updates ............................................................................................................................... 3-4
Maintenance........................................................................................................................ 3-5
Disclaimer ........................................................................................................................... 3-5
Limitation of liability ........................................................................................................... 3-5
U.S. government ................................................................................................................. 3-6
Term of license .................................................................................................................... 3-6
Governing law ..................................................................................................................... 3-6
Assignment .......................................................................................................................... 3-6
Survival of provisions .......................................................................................................... 3-7
Entire agreement ................................................................................................................ 3-7
Third party software ........................................................................................................... 3-7
Hardware warranty ................................................................................................................. 3-10
Limit of liability ....................................................................................................................... 3-11
Chapter 4: Reference information .............................................................................. 4-1
Equipment specifications .......................................................................................................... 4-2
AP specifications ................................................................................................................. 4-2
SM specifications ................................................................................................................ 4-7
Wireless specifications ............................................................................................................ 4-11
General wireless specifications ......................................................................................... 4-11
Data network specifications .................................................................................................... 4-12
Ethernet interface ............................................................................................................. 4-12
Compliance with safety standards .......................................................................................... 4-13
Electrical safety compliance ............................................................................................. 4-13
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance............................................................ 4-13
Human exposure to radio frequency energy ..................................................................... 4-14
Compliance with radio regulations ......................................................................................... 4-19
Type approvals .................................................................................................................. 4-19
DFS for 5.4 GHz Radios .................................................................................................... 4-20
Country Codes and available spectrum ............................................................................ 4-22
FCC compliance testing .................................................................................................... 4-37
FCC and ICC IDs and certification numbers ..................................................................... 4-38
Listen Before Talk (FCC LBT) for 3.6 GHz Band .............................................................. 4-43
Listen-Before-Talk (LBT) ETSI for the 5.4 GHz Band ....................................................... 4-45
Notifications ............................................................................................................................ 4-49
PMP 450 regulatory compliance ....................................................................................... 4-49
Appendix A: Glossary ............................................................................................... 4-54

pmp-0047 (August 2015) ix


PMP 450 Planning Guide List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure 1 Line Of Sight Diagram .................................................................................................... 1-3
Figure 2 AP, Radio unit ................................................................................................................. 1-6
Figure 3 AP, antenna ..................................................................................................................... 1-6
Figure 4 AP interfaces – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz and 5 GHz................................................... 1-7
Figure 5 AP interfaces - 5 GHz original layout.............................................................................. 1-9
Figure 6 AP ground and equilibrium membrane vent ................................................................. 1-10
Figure 7 AP diagnostic LEDs, viewed from unit front ................................................................. 1-10
Figure 8 PMP 450 Series SM ...................................................................................................... 1-12
Figure 9 SM interfaces ................................................................................................................ 1-13
Figure 10 Connectorized SM ...................................................................................................... 1-14
Figure 11 Integrated Dish SM (PMP 450d)................................................................................. 1-14
Figure 12 SM diagnostic LEDs, viewed from unit front .............................................................. 1-16
Figure 13 TDD Frame Division..................................................................................................... 1-19
Figure 14 AP web-based management screenshot ..................................................................... 1-36
Figure 15 Determinants in Rx signal level ................................................................................... 2-47
Figure 16 Spectrum Analyzer ...................................................................................................... 2-49
Figure 17 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABCD), 90 degree sectors ...................... 2-51
Figure 18 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABC), 60 degree sectors......................... 2-52
Figure 19 OFDM Frame Calculator tab ...................................................................................... 2-54
Figure 20 Variables for calculating angle of elevation (and depression).................................... 2-59
Figure 21 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones ......................... 2-63
Figure 22 Grounding cable minimum bend radius and angle ...................................................... 2-65
Figure 23 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower ............................................... 2-65
Figure 24 Grounding and lightning protection on wall ............................................................... 2-66
Figure 25 Grounding and lightning protection on building ........................................................ 2-67
Figure 26 Grounding and lightning protection inside high building .......................................... 2-68
Figure 27 One unsynchronized AP in cluster resulting in self-interference ............................... 2-71
Figure 28 GPS timing throughout the network ........................................................................... 2-71
Figure 29 Cambium networks management domain ................................................................... 2-74
Figure 30 Example of IP address in Class B subnet..................................................................... 2-76
Figure 31 Login page - Security Banner ...................................................................................... 2-86
Figure 32 Categorical protocol filtering ..................................................................................... 2-88
Figure 33 AP DFS Status............................................................................................................. 4-20
Figure 34 LBT ETSI 5.4 GHz procedure for AP ........................................................................... 4-45
Figure 35 LBT ETSI 5.4 GHz procedure for SM .......................................................................... 4-46
Figure 36 LBT ETSI 5.4 GHz AP configuration ............................................................................ 4-47
Figure 37 LBT AP configuration for 5.4 GHz ............................................................................... 4-48
Figure 38 LBT ETSI 5.4 GHz AP Region and Country Code ........................................................ 4-48
PMP 450 Planning Guide

List of Tables
Table 1 PMP 450 frequency variants ............................................................................................ 1-5
Table 2 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz and 5 GHz .............. 1-8
Table 3 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 5 GHz original layout ........................................ 1-9
Table 4 AP interface descriptions and cabling – ground lug ....................................................... 1-10
Table 5 AP LED descriptions ....................................................................................................... 1-11
Table 6 SM Interfaces ................................................................................................................. 1-15
Table 7 SM diagnostic LED descriptions..................................................................................... 1-17
Table 8 Modulation levels ............................................................................................................ 1-20
Table 9 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4 GHz ..................................................... 1-21
Table 10 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8 GHz ................................................... 1-23
Table 11 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 2.4 GHz ................................................... 1-25
Table 12 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.5 GHz ................................................... 1-27
Table 13 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.6 GHz ................................................... 1-29
Table 14 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM .. 1-31
Table 15 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM ... 1-32
Table 16 Deployment scenario terminology descriptions ............................................................. 2-3
Table 17 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – FSK (PMP 1x0 Series) .............................. 2-5
Table 18 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM (PMP 430 Series) .......................... 2-5
Table 19 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM MIMO-B (PMP 450 Series)............ 2-6
Table 20 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM .................... 2-7
Table 21 Deployment scenario 1 ................................................................................................... 2-7
Table 22 Scenario 1 spectrum usage ............................................................................................ 2-8
Table 23 Deployment scenario 2 ................................................................................................. 2-10
Table 24 Deployment scenario 2 spectrum usage ....................................................................... 2-11
Table 25 Sync cable length specification .................................................................................... 2-12
Table 26 Lateral force - metric .................................................................................................... 2-13
Table 27 Lateral force - US ......................................................................................................... 2-14
Table 28 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 2-16
Table 29 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 2-18
Table 30 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................... 2-20
Table 31 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 2-22
Table 32 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 2-24
Table 33 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................... 2-26
Table 34 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 2-28
Table 35 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 2-29
Table 36 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................... 2-30
Table 37 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 2-31
Table 38 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 2-32
Table 39 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 7 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................... 2-33
Table 40 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................... 2-34

pmp-0047 (August 2015) xi


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 41 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 2-35
Table 42 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................. 2-36
Table 43 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 7 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................... 2-37
Table 44 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth .................... 2-38
Table 45 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel
Bandwidth ............................................................................................................................... 2-39
Table 46 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel
Bandwidth ............................................................................................................................... 2-40
Table 47 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel
Bandwidth ............................................................................................................................... 2-41
Table 48 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel
Bandwidth ............................................................................................................................... 2-42
Table 49 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel
Bandwidth ............................................................................................................................... 2-43
Table 50 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel
Bandwidth ............................................................................................................................... 2-45
Table 51 Example 5.8-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector .............................................. 2-51
Table 52 Example 5.8 GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector .............................................. 2-52
Table 53 OFDM Frame Calculator tab attributes ........................................................................ 2-54
Table 54 OFDM Calculated Frame Results attributes ................................................................. 2-56
Table 55 Special case VLAN IDs .................................................................................................. 2-78
Table 56 VLAN filters in point-to-multipoint modules................................................................. 2-78
Table 57 Q-in-Q Ethernet frame .................................................................................................. 2-80
Table 58 Identity-based user account permissions - AP .............................................................. 2-82
Table 59 Identity-based user account permissions - SM ............................................................. 2-84
Table 60 Ports filtered per protocol selections ........................................................................... 2-89
Table 61 Device default port numbers ........................................................................................ 2-90
Table 62 PMP 450 components ................................................................................................... 2-94
Table 63 AP physical specifications ............................................................................................... 4-2
Table 64 SM physical specifications .............................................................................................. 4-7
Table 65 PMP 450 wireless specifications .................................................................................. 4-11
Table 66 PMP 450 Ethernet bridging specifications ................................................................... 4-12
Table 67 PMP 450 safety compliance specifications ................................................................... 4-13
Table 68 EMC emissions compliance ........................................................................................... 4-13
Table 69 Power Compliance Margins.......................................................................................... 4-17
Table 70 Radio certifications....................................................................................................... 4-19
Table 71 OFDM DFS operation based on Country Code setting ................................................. 4-21
Table 72 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.5 GHz ............................................ 4-23
Table 73 AP Default combined Tx power per Country Code and Channel Bandwidth, 3.5 GHz. 4-24
Table 74 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.6 GHz ............................................ 4-25
Table 75 AP Default combined Tx power per Country Code and Channel Bandwidth, 3.6 GHz. 4-26
Table 76 Center channel details based on Country Code, 2.4 GHz ............................................ 4-27
Table 77 AP Default combined Tx power per Country Code and Band Edge Path Max TX Detail,
2.4 GHz. .................................................................................................................................. 4-28
Table 78 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.4 GHz ............................................ 4-29
Table 79 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.8 GHz ............................................ 4-31

xii pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 80 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.4 GHz band ......................... 4-33
Table 81 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.8 GHz band ......................... 4-35
Table 82 US FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers and Covered Configurations . 4-
38
Table 83 LBT Status for ETSI 5.4 GHz ......................................................................................... 4-47
Table 84 Industry Canada approved antenna list........................................................................ 4-50
Table 85 Glossary ........................................................................................................................ 4-54

pmp-0047 (August 2015) xiii


PMP 450 Planning Guide

About This Planning Guide


This guide describes the planning of the Cambium PMP 450 Series of point-to-multipoint
wireless equipment deployment. It is intended for use by the system designer.
The guide consists of the following chapters:
 Chapter 1: Product description on page 1-1
 Chapter 2: Planning considerations on page 2-1
 Chapter 3: Legal information on page 3-1
 Chapter 4: Reference information on page 4-1

xiv pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

General information

Version information
The following shows the issue status of this document since it was first released:

Issue Date of issue Remarks

001v000 September 2012 System Release 12.0

002v000 October 2012 Includes additional co-location


information

003v000 November 2012 Updated for System Release 12.0.1

004v000 January 2013 Updated for System Release 12.0.2

005v000 March 2013 Updated for System Release


12.0.3/12.0.3.1
Includes additional performance
details (SNR)

006v000 / June 2013 Updated for System Release 12.1


007v000

008v000 September 2013 Updated for System Release 12.1.2

009v000 December 2013 Updated for System Release 12.2

010v000 / March 2014 Updated for System Release 13.0


011v000

012v000 March 2014 Updated for System Release 13.1

013v000 April 2014 Updated for System Release 13.1.1

014v000 April 2014 Updated for System Release 13.1.2

015v000 November 2014 Updated for System Release 13.2

016v000 March 2015 Updated for System Release 13.3

017v000 August 2015 Updated for System Release 13.4

pmp-0047 (August 2015) xv


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Contacting Cambium Networks


PMP support website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support

Cambium main website: http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/

Sales enquiries: [email protected]

Email support: [email protected]

RMA Inquiries - [email protected]

For list of telephone numbers, see:

http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/contact-support

Address: Cambium Networks

3800 Golf Road, Suite 360

Rolling Meadows, IL 60008

Purpose
Cambium Networks Point-To-Multipoint (PMP) documents are intended to instruct and
assist personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Cambium PMP
equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all personnel engaged in such
activities be properly trained.
Cambium disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss
or reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the
customer, or anyone acting on the customer's behalf, to abide by the instructions, system
parameters, or recommendations made in this document.

Cross references
References to external publications are shown in italics. Other cross references,
emphasized in blue text in electronic versions, are active links to the references.
This document is divided into numbered chapters that are divided into sections. Sections
are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the
table of contents.

Feedback
We appreciate feedback from the users of our documents. This includes feedback on the
structure, content, accuracy, or completeness of our documents. Send feedback to email
support (see ‘Contacting Cambium Networks’).

xvi pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Problems and warranty

Reporting problems
If any problems are encountered when installing or operating this equipment, follow this
procedure to investigate and report:
1 Search this document and the software release notes of supported releases.

2 Visit the support website. http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support


3 Ask for assistance from the Cambium product supplier.
4 Gather information from affected units such as:
 The IP addresses and MAC addresses.
 The software releases.
 The configuration of software features.
 Any available diagnostic downloads.
 CNUT Support Capture Tool information
5 Escalate the problem by emailing or telephoning support.
See ‘Contacting Cambium Networks’ for URLs, email addresses and telephone numbers.

Repair and service


If unit failure is suspected, obtain details of the Return Material Authorization (RMA)
process from the support website.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) xvii


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Warranty
Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from
Cambium or a Cambium distributor. Cambium warrants that hardware will conform to the
relevant published specifications and is free from material defects in material and
workmanship under normal use and service. Cambium shall within this time, at its own
option, either repair or replace the defective product within thirty (30) days of receipt of
the defective product. Repaired or replaced product is subject to the original warranty
period but not less than thirty (30) days.
To register PMP products or activate warranties, visit the support website.
Extended warranties are available for PMP products. For warranty assistance, contact the
reseller or distributor.

Using non-Cambium parts for repair could damage the equipment and will void warranty.
Contact Cambium for service and repair instructions.

Portions of Cambium equipment may be damaged from exposure to electrostatic


discharge. Use precautions to prevent damage.

xviii pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Security advice

Cambium Networks systems and equipment provide security parameters that can be
configured by the operator based on their particular operating environment. Cambium
recommends setting and using these parameters following industry recognized security
practices. Security aspects to be considered are protecting the confidentiality, integrity,
and availability of information and assets. Assets include the ability to communicate,
information about the nature of the communications, and information about the parties
involved.
In certain instances Cambium makes specific recommendations regarding security
practices, however the implementation of these recommendations and final responsibility
for the security of the system lies with the operator of the system.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) xix


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Warnings, cautions, and notes

The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this document and in all
documents of the Cambium Networks document set.

Warnings
Warnings precede instructions that contain potentially hazardous situations. Warnings are
used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life or physical injury.
A warning has the following format:

Warning text and consequence for not following the instructions in the warning.

Cautions
Cautions precede instructions and are used when there is a possibility of damage to
systems, software, or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this
damage presents no danger to personnel. A caution has the following format:

Caution text and consequence for not following the instructions in the caution.

Notes
A note means that there is a possibility of an undesirable situation or provides additional
information to help the reader understand a topic or concept. A note has the following
format:

Note text.

xx pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Chapter 1: Product description


This chapter provides a high level description of the PMP 450 product. It describes in
general terms the function of the product, the main product variants and typical
deployment. It also describes the main hardware components.
The chapter consists of the following topics:
 Overview of PMP 450 on page 1-2: Introduces the key features, typical uses, product
variants and components of the PMP 450.
 Access Point (AP) on page 1-6: Describes the AP and its interfaces
 Subscriber Module (SM) on page 1-12: Describes the SM and its interfaces
 Cabling and lightning protection on page 1-18: Describes the cabling and lightning
protection components of a PMP 450 installation.
 Wireless operation on page 1-19: Describes how the PMP 450 wireless link is operated,
including modulation modes, power control and security.
 System management on page 1-35: Introduces the PMP 450 management system,
including the web interface, installation, configuration, alerts and upgrades.
PMP 450 Planning Guide

Overview of PMP 450


This section introduces the key features, typical uses, product variants and components of
the PMP 450.

Purpose
Cambium PMP 450 Series networks are designed for wireless point-to-multipoint links in the
unlicensed 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz bands. Users must ensure that
the PMP 450 Series complies with local operating regulations.
The PMP 450 Series adds dramatically increased network throughput and capacity. The
PMP 450 Series enables network operators to grow their business by offering more capacity
for data, voice and video applications.

Key features
The Cambium PMP 450 Series offers the following benefits:
 Cambium’s highest performing point-to-multipoint solution, with up to 125 Mbps usable
throughput
 State-of-the-art MIMO (Multi-In Multi-Out) technology
 Better spectral efficiency than other MIMO alternatives
 Efficient GPS synchronized, scheduled TDD operation for easy Access Point site
deployment and performance that is consistent regardless of subscriber loading
 A range of cost-effective subscriber device solutions to meet the business case of any
network application
 MIMO Matrix B: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a
radio transmission under proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted
simultaneously on two different antennas.
 MIMO-A mode – System Release 13.2 introduces this mode of operation using the same
modulation levels as the MIMO-B mode, namely: QPSK, 16-QAM, 64-QAM and 256-QAM.

nLOS benefits and limitations


In addition to providing LOS (Line-Of-Sight) connectivity, use of OFDM technology can
provide nLOS (near Line-Of-Sight) connectivity and sometimes NLOS (Non-Line-Of-Sight)
connectivity:
 LOS: the installer can see the AP from the SM and the first Fresnel zone is clear.
 nLOS: the installer can see the AP from the SM, but a portion of the first Fresnel zone is
blocked.
 NLOS: the installer cannot see the AP from the SM and a portion or even much of the
first Fresnel zone is blocked, but subsequent Fresnel zones are open.

1-2 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 1 Line Of Sight Diagram

Whereas multi-pathing degrades a link in some technologies (FSK, for example), OFDM can
often use multi-pathing to an advantage to overcome nLOS, especially in cases where the
Fresnel zone is only partially blocked by buildings, “urban canyons”, or foliage. OFDM tends
to help especially when obstacles are near the middle of the link, and less so when the
obstacles are very near the SM or AP.
However, attenuation through walls and trees is substantial for any use of the
2.4/3.5/3.6/5.4/5.8 GHz frequency bands. Even with OFDM, these products are not expected
to penetrate walls or extensive trees and foliage.

Typical deployment
The PMP 450 Series consists of Access Point Modules and Subscriber Modules. The radio
link operates on a single frequency channel in each direction using Time Division Duplex
(TDD).
Applications for the PMP 450 Series include:
 High throughput enterprise applications
 nLOS video surveillance in metro areas
 Urban area network extension
 Network extension into areas with foliage

Greenfield deployment
The PMP 450 Series equipment may be deployed as a standalone network deployment
offering a high-speed access network.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-3


PMP 450 Planning Guide

System components
PMP 450 Access Point
 Access Point Module (AP): A connectorized outdoor transceiver unit containing all the
radio, networking, and surge suppression electronics.
 Access Point Power Supply: An indoor power supply module providing Power-over-
Ethernet (PoE) supply to the Access Point.
 Cabling: Cat 5e cables, grounding cables, and connectors.

PMP 450 Subscriber Module


 Integrated Subscriber Module (SM): An integrated-antenna outdoor transceiver unit
containing all the radio, antenna, and networking electronics.
 Connectorized Subscriber Module (CSM): A connectorized outdoor transceiver unit
containing all of the radio and network electronics that needs to be mated with a
customer supplied external antenna.
 Subscriber Module Power Supply: An indoor power supply module providing Power-
over-Ethernet (PoE) supply to the Subscriber Module.
 Cabling and lightning protection: Cat 5e cables, grounding cables, connectors and
lightning protection (surge suppression).

1-4 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Product variants
The PMP 450 Series is available in the following product variants:
Table 1 PMP 450 frequency variants

Variant Region Frequency Channel Variant Notes


Coverage Bandwidth
(MHz) (MHz)

2.4 GHz FCC ISM 2400 – 5/10/20 -


PMP 450 Band 2483.5

3.5 GHz 3300 – 3600 5/7/10/20 Combined Transmit power


PMP 450 limited based on Country
Code setting. Available
center frequencies based on
Country Code setting.

3.6 GHz 3550-3800 5/7/10/20 Combined Transmit power


PMP 450 limited based on Country
Code setting. Available
center frequencies based on
Country Code setting.

5.4/5.8- FCC UNII 5470 - 5875 10/20 (5MHz Combined Transmit power
GHz PMP Band not available limited based on Country
450 ETSI Band B in DFS Code setting
regions)
ETSI Band C

5.8-GHz FCC ISM 5725 - 5875 5/10/20 US Only – locked to US


PMP 450 Band Country Code EIRP limit of
(US ONLY) 36 dBm and 5.8-GHz Only

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-5


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Access Point (AP)


The AP is a self-contained unit that houses both radio and networking electronics. The AP is
supplied in a connectorized configuration for use with an external antenna. Connectorized
units with external antennas can cope with more difficult radio conditions.

Figure 2 AP, Radio unit Figure 3 AP, antenna

1-6 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

AP interfaces
The AP interfaces are illustrated below.
Figure 4 AP interfaces – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz and 5 GHz

Path A RF Port Sync/Default Ethernet Path B RF Port

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-7


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 2 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz and 5 GHz

Interface Function Cabling

-45 degree RF connection to AP


2.4 GHz
antenna

-45 degree RF connection to AP


3.5 GHz
Path A RF antenna 50 ohm RF cable, N-
Port -45 degree RF connection to AP type
3.6 GHz
antenna

Vertical RF connection to AP
5 GHz
antenna

+45 degree RF connection to


2.4 GHz
AP antenna

+45 degree RF connection to


3.5 GHz
Path B RF AP antenna 50 ohm RF cable, N-
Port +45 degree RF connection to type
3.6 GHz
AP antenna

Horizontal RF connection to AP
5 GHz
antenna

Sync/Default GPS synchronization signaling


provides power to UGPS RJ11 cable, default
module. This is the Default plug plug.
port.

Power-over-Ethernet,
Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
Ethernet
communications (management RJ45 cable
communications
and data)
(management and data)

1-8 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 5 AP interfaces - 5 GHz original layout

Path V RF Port Path H RF Port


Sync/Default Ethernet Unused

Table 3 AP interface descriptions and cabling – 5 GHz original layout

Interface Function Cabling

Vertical RF connection to AP 50 ohm RF cable,


Path V RF Port
antenna N-type

Horizontal RF connection to AP 50 ohm RF cable, N-


Path H RF Port
antenna type

Sync/Default GPS synchronization signaling


RJ11 cable, default
provides power to UGPS module.
plug.
This is the Default plug port.

Power-over-Ethernet,
Ethernet Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
communications communications (management and RJ45 cable
(management and data)
data)

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-9


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 6 AP ground and equilibrium membrane vent


Equilibrium Membrane
Vent (do not cover)

AP Ground

The ports on the 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz AP are slightly different.

Table 4 AP interface descriptions and cabling – ground lug

Interface Function Cabling

Ground Lug (bottom of For grounding the unit 10 AWG copper wire
unit)

AP diagnostic LEDs
The diagnostic LEDs report the following information about the status of the module.

The LED color helps you distinguish position of the LED. The LED color does not indicate
any status.

Figure 7 AP diagnostic LEDs, viewed from unit front

PWR SYN/1 SES/2 GPS/3 ACT/4 LNK/5

1-10 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 5 AP LED descriptions

LED Color when Status information Notes


active provided

Always lit after 10-20


PWR Red DC power
seconds of power on.

SYN/1 Yellow Presence of sync Always lit on the AP.

SES/2 Green Unused on the AP -

Lit when the AP/BHM is


getting a sync pulse from a
GPS/3 Red Pulse of sync
GPS source goes along with
SYN/1

Flashes during data transfer.


Presence of data activity
ACT/4 Yellow Frequency of flash is not a
on the Ethernet link
diagnostic indication.

Continuously lit when link is


LNK/5 Green Ethernet link
present.

Network connection
The network connection to a PMP 450 Series AP is made via a 10 BaseT or 100 BaseT
Ethernet connection. Power is provided to the AP over the Ethernet connection using a
patented non-standard powering technique.

AP power supply
The AP power supply generates the AP supply voltage (29 VDC) from the external DC source
and injects the supply voltage into the AP.
The power supply is connected to the AP and network equipment using Cat5e cable with
RJ45 connectors. See Cabling and lightning protection on page 1-18.

The PMP 450 AP can use the GigE power injector.

Further reading on the AP


For more information on the AP, see AP or SM site selection on page 2-12, which describes
how to select a site for the AP or SM.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-11


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Subscriber Module (SM)

The SM is a self-contained unit that houses both radio and networking electronics. The SM
is available in a connectorized model and also in an integrated antenna configuration, but
may also be used with a passive reflector dish or CLIP (Cassegrain Lens for Improved
Performance, 5 GHz only).
Figure 8 PMP 450 Series SM

3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz PMP 450 SMs appear a bit different from the existing 5 GHz and 2.4
GHz PMP 450 SMs.

Mounting brackets
For mounting PMP 450 SMs, Cambium Networks offers the SMMB1A mounting bracket.

Network connection
The network connection to a PMP 450 Series SM is made via a 10 BaseT or 100 BaseT
Ethernet connection. Power is provided to the SM over the Ethernet connection using a
patented non-standard powering technique.

SM power supply
The SM power supply generates the SM supply voltage (29 VDC) from the external DC
source and injects the supply voltage into the SM.
The power supply is connected to the SM and network equipment using Cat5e cable with
RJ45 connectors. See Cabling and lightning protection on page 1-18.

1-12 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Further reading on the SM


For more information on the SM, see AP or SM site selection on page 2-12, which describes
how to select a site for the SM.

SM interfaces
Figure 9 SM interfaces

SM Ground
(connectorized
models)

Ethernet Sync/Default

3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz SMs appear a bit different from the existing 5 GHz and 2.4 GHz 450
SMs.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-13


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 10 Connectorized SM

External
antenna cable,
path A
(labeled “A”)

External
antenna cable,
path B

Figure 11 Integrated Dish SM (PMP 450d)

1-14 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 6 SM Interfaces

Interface Function Cabling

Power-over-Ethernet, Ethernet
Ethernet communications (management RJ45 Cable
and data)

Sync/Default GPS synchronization signaling


RJ11 cable, default
provides power to UGPS module.
plug
This is the Default plug port.

Ground Lug (rear of For grounding the unit 10 AWG copper


unit, connectorized only) wire

External antenna cable, 2.4 -45 degree antenna 50 ohm RF cable,


path A (labeled “A”) GHz connection N-type

3.5 -45 degree antenna


GHz connection

3.6 -45 degree antenna


GHz connection

5 GHz Vertical antenna


connection

External antenna cable, 2.4 +45 degree antenna 50 ohm RF cable,


path B GHz connection N-type

3.5 +45 degree antenna


GHz connection

3.6 +45 degree antenna


GHz connection

5 GHz Horizontal antenna


connection

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-15


PMP 450 Planning Guide

SM diagnostic LEDs
The diagnostic LEDs report the following information about the status of the module. The
SM LEDs provide different status based on the mode of the SM. SM in “operating” mode
will register and pass traffic normally. A SM in “aiming” mode does not register or pass
traffic, but will display (via LED panel) the strength of received radio signals (based on radio
channel selected via Tools => Alignment).

The LED color helps you distinguish position of the LED. The LED color does not indicate
any status.

Figure 12 SM diagnostic LEDs, viewed from unit front

SM LED Display LED Labels

LNK/5 ACT/4 GPS/3 SES/2 SYN/1 PWR

The LED display of the 3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz SMs appear a bit different from the existing
2.4 GHz and 5 GHz 450 SMs.

1-16 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 7 SM diagnostic LED descriptions

Status information provided

LED Color SM in SM in “Aiming” Notes


when “Operating” Mode
active Mode

Continuously lit when link is


LNK/5 Green Ethernet link
These five LEDs present.

Presence of data act as a bar Flashes during data


activity graph to indicate transfer. Frequency of flash
ACT/4 Yellow
on the Ethernet the relative is not a diagnostic
link quality of indication.
alignment. As
On - high interference.
power level
Blinking - medium
GPS/3 Red Unused improves during
interference.
alignment, more
Off - low interference.
of these LEDs
SES/2 Green Session Indicator are lit. Lit when SM is in session.

Lit when SM/BHS is in sync


SYN/1 Yellow Presence of sync
with an AP/BHM.

Always lit after 10-20


PWR Red DC power
seconds of power on.

Operating Mode
 Scanning: If the SM is not registered to AP/BHM, then these three LEDs cycle on and
off from left to right (SYN/1, SES/2 and GPS/3).
 Ethernet Link: The LNK/5 LED lit continuously when link is present.
 Data Transfer: The ACT/4 LED lit on the presence of data activity on the Ethernet link.

Aiming Mode
The 5 LEDs (SYN/1, SES/2, GPS/3, ACT/4 and LNK/5) are turned into a 5-position bar graph.
The more LEDs that are lit, the better the RSSI and Jitter values the module is seeing. The
colors of the LEDS have no particular meaning other than to assist is distinguishing one
position from the next.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-17


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Cabling and lightning protection


This section describes the cabling and lightning protection components of a PMP 450
installation.

PMP and lightning protection


Due to the full metallic connection to the tower or support structure through the AP
antenna, grounding the AP and installing a 600SS surge suppressor at the Ethernet cable
building ingress is strongly recommended. This suppresses overvoltages and overcurrents
such as those caused by near-miss lightning. APs provide a grounding lug for grounding to
the tower or support structure.

The PMP 450 Series is not designed to survive direct lightning strikes. For this reason the
unit must not be installed as the highest point in a localized area.

Outdoor connections
The term ‘drop cable’ refers to the cable that is used for all connections that terminate
outside the building, for example, connections between the AP/SM, surge suppressors (if
installed), GPS receivers (if installed) and the power supply injector.
The following practices are essential to the reliability and longevity of cabled connections:
 Use only shielded cables and connectors to resist interference and corrosion
 For vertical runs, provide cable support and strain relief
 Include a 2 ft (0.6 m) service loop on each end of the cable to allow for thermal
expansion and contraction and to facilitate terminating the cable again when needed
 Include a drip loop to shed water so that most of the water does not reach the connector
at the device
 Properly crimp all connectors
 Use dielectric grease on all connectors to resist corrosion

1-18 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Wireless operation
This section describes how the PMP 450 wireless link is operated, including modulation
modes, power control and security.

Time division duplexing


The system uses Time Division Duplexing (TDD) – one channel alternately transmits and
receives rather than using one channel for transmitting and a second channel for receiving.
To accomplish TDD, the AP must provide sync to its SMs. Furthermore, collocated APs must
be synced together – an unsynchronized AP that transmits during the receive cycle of a
collocated AP can prevent a second AP from being able to decode the signals from its SMs.
In addition, across a geographical area, APs that can “hear” each other benefit from using a
common sync to further reduce self-interference within the network.
Modules use TDD on a common frequency to divide frames for uplink (orange) and downlink
(green) usage, as shown in Figure 13.
For more information on synchronization configuration options, see section Planning for co-
location and using the OFDM Frame Calculator Tool on page 2-53.

Figure 13 TDD Frame Division

Time

OFDM and channel bandwidth


The PMP 450 Series transmits using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM).
The channel bandwidth of the OFDM signal may be configured to 5 MHz (2.4 GHz, 3.5GHz,
3.6 GHz and 5.8 GHz only), 10 MHz or 20 MHz.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-19


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Link operation – Dynamic Rate Adapt


PMP 450 Series products offer eight levels or speeds of operation – 2X MIMO-B and 1X
MIMO-A (QPSK), 4X MIMO-B and 2X MIMO-A (16-QAM), 6x MIMO-B and 3X MIMO-A (64-
QAM) and 8X MIMO-B and 4X MIMO-A (265-QAM). If received power is less due to distance
between the AP and the SM or due to obstructions, or if interference affects the RF
environment, the system will automatically and dynamically adjust links to the best
operation level.
The system chooses its operation rate dynamically, based on an internal ARQ (Automatic
Repeat reQuest) error control method. With ARQ, every data slot of every frame sent over
the air (except downlink broadcast) is expected to be acknowledged by the receiver, and if
acknowledgement is not received, the data is resent. The sending unit monitors these re-
sends and adjusts the operation rate accordingly. A system may have links that change
levels of operation as the RF environment changes. Furthermore, the links operate
independently; normal operation can have a downlink running at 6x while the uplink RF
environment only supports 2x.
Optimal sector utilization involves having as many links as possible running at 8x. This
provides as much capacity as possible for the sector.
In addition to introducing MIMO-A modes, improvements have been made to the existing
rate adapt algorithm to switch between MIMO-A and MIMO-B seamlessly without any
intervention or added configuration by the operator. The various modulation levels used by
the PMP / PTP 450 are shown in Table 8.

Table 8 Modulation levels

Rate MIMO-B MIMO-A SISO (for PMP 430


interoperability)

QPSK 2X MIMO-B 1X MIMO-A 1X SISO

16-QAM 4X MIMO-B 2X MIMO-A 2X SISO

64-QAM 6X MIMO-B 3X MIMO-A 3X SISO

265-QAM 8X MIMO-B 4X MIMO-A

1-20 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 9 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4 GHz

Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16-QAM- 64-QAM- 256-QAM-
Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with Integrated 6.6 mi / 4.7 mi / 2.4 mi / 1.0 mi / 0.4 mi /


SM antenna 10.6 km 7.5 km 3.9 km 1.6 km 0.6 km

5.4GHz Max. with Integrated


LOS Link Dish that adds
40.0 mi / 29.5 mi / 15.2 mi / 6.5 mi / 2.3 mi /
Budget (no fade 17 dB to SM
64.0 km 47.2 km 24.3 km 10.4 km 3.7 km
margin) – 20 capability (SM
MHz channel 450d)
bandwidth with Reflector
Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 29.5 mi / 15.2 mi / 6.5 mi / 2.3 mi /
16 dB to SM 64.0 km 47.2 km 24.3 km 10.4 km 3.7 km
capability

with Integrated 9.7 mi / 6.8 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.6 mi /


SM antenna 15.4 km 10.9 km 5.4 km 2.6 km 1.0 km

5.4GHz Max. with Integrated


LOS Link Dish that adds
40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 21.4 mi / 10.3 mi / 3.8 mi /
Budget (no fade 17 dB to SM
64.0 km 64.0 km 34.2 km 16.5 km 6.1 km
margin) – 10 capability (SM
MHz channel 450d)
bandwidth
with Reflector
PMP 4501 Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 21.4 mi / 10.3 mi / 3.8 mi /
16 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 34.2 km 16.5 km 6.1 km
capability

with Integrated 13.9 mi / 9.9 mi / 4.5 mi / 2.2 mi / 0.8 mi /


SM antenna 22.3 km 15.8 km 7.1 km 3.6 km 1.3 km

5.4GHz Max. with Integrated


LOS Link Dish that adds
40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 28.1 mi / 14.1 mi / 5.0 mi /
Budget (no fade 17 dB to SM
64.0 km 64.0 km 45.0 km 22.6 km 8.0 km
margin) – 5 capability (SM
MHz channel 450d)
bandwidth
with Reflector
Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 28.1 mi / 14.1 mi / 5.0 mi /
16 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 45.0 km 22.6 km 8.0 km
capability

5.4GHz Max. 20 MHz


129.5
Aggregate Channel: 16.2 Mbps 32.4 Mbps 64.7 Mbps 97.1 Mbps
Mbps
Throughput (up+down)
with 1/16 Cyclic
Prefix and 10 MHz
Frame Period Channel: 6.9 Mbps 13.9 Mbps 27.9 Mbps 41.8 Mbps 55.7 Mbps
2.5 ms to 1 SM (up+down)
(75%/25%
DL/UL Ratio) – 5 MHz Channel:
2.2 Mbps 4.5 Mbps 9 Mbps 13.5 Mbps 18.1 Mbps
RF Link Test (up+down)

1
Maximum setting of Max capability parameter is 40 mi. Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory
requirements.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-21


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
20 MHz
5.4GHz Max. 149.1
Channel: 18.6 Mbps 37.3 Mbps 74.5 Mbps 111.9 Mbps
Aggregate Mbps
(up+down)
Throughput
with 1/16 Cyclic 10 MHz
Prefix and Channel: 8.8 Mbps 17.4 Mbps 34.8 Mbps 52.2 Mbps 69.6 Mbps
Frame Period 5 (up+down)
ms to 1 SM
(75%/25%
DL/UL Ratio) – 5 MHz Channel:
3.8 Mbps 7.5 Mbps 15.2 Mbps 22.7 Mbps 30.3 Mbps
RF Link Test (up+down)

5.4GHz 20 MHz
-81 dBm -81 dBm -75 dBm -68 dBm -59 dBm
Nominal Per- Channel
Chain Receive
SM RX 10 MHz
-84 dBm -84 dBm -78 dBm -72 dBm -63 dBm
Sensitivity Channel
(including
FEC)2 5 MHz Channel -88 dBm -88 dBm -81 dBm -75 dBm -66 dBm

20 MHz
128.1 125.1 119.35 111.97 103
Channel
Link Budget, 10 MHz
Integrated (dB) 131.4 128.4 122.3 116 107.3
Channel

5 MHz Channel 134.6 131.6 124.7 118.7 109.7

Range for additional MIMO-A modes is not shown here as it depends on the relative power
between the two branches. The range for each MIMO-A mode is greater than or equal to the
range for the corresponding MIMO-B mode.

2
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed
receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.

1-22 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 10 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8 GHz

Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16-QAM- 64-QAM- 256-QAM-
Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with Integrated 7.0 mi / 5.0 mi / 2.3 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.4 mi /


SM antenna 11.3 km 8.0 km 3.6 km 1.8 km 0.6 km

5.8GHz Max. LOS with Integrated


Link Budget (no Dish that adds
40.0 mi / 31.5 mi / 14.2 mi / 7.1 mi / 2.5 mi /
fade margin) – 20 17 dB to SM
64.0 km 50.4 km 22.8 km 11.4 km 4.0 km
MHz channel capability (SM
bandwidth 450d)

with Reflector
Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 31.5 mi / 14.2 mi / 7.1 mi / 2.5 mi /
16 dB to SM 64.0 km 50.4 km 22.8 km 11.4 km 4.0 km
capability

with Integrated 9.3 mi / 6.6 mi / 2.9 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.5 mi /


SM antenna 14.9 km 10.5 km 4.7 km 2.3 km 0.9 km

5.8GHz Max. LOS with Integrated


Link Budget (no Dish that adds
40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 18.5 mi / 9.2 mi / 3.4 mi /
fade margin) – 10 17 dB to SM
64.0 km 64.0 km 29.6 km 14.7 km 5.5 km
MHz channel capability (SM
bandwidth 450d)

with Reflector
PMP 4503
Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 18.5 mi / 9.2 mi / 3.4 mi /
16 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 29.6 km 14.7 km 5.5 km
capability

with Integrated 13.4 mi / 9.5 mi / 4.3 mi / 2.2 mi / 0.7 mi /


SM antenna 21.5 km 15.2 km 6.9 km 3.4 km 1.1 km

5.8GHz Max. LOS with Integrated


Link Budget (no Dish that adds
40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 27.4 mi / 13.6 mi / 4.3 mi /
fade margin) – 5 17 dB to SM
64.0 km 64.0 km 43.8 km 21.7 km 6.9 km
MHz channel capability (SM
bandwidth 450d)

with Reflector
Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 27.4 mi / 13.6 mi / 4.3 mi /
16 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 43.8 km 21.7 km 6.9 km
capability

20 MHz
5.8GHz Max. Channel: 16.2 Mbps 32.4 Mbps 64.7 Mbps 97.1 Mbps 129.5 Mbps
Aggregate (up+down)
Throughput with
1/16 Cyclic Prefix 10 MHz
and Frame Period Channel: 6.9 Mbps 13.9 Mbps 27.9 Mbps 41.8 Mbps 55.7 Mbps
2.5 ms to 1 SM (up+down)
(75%/25% DL/UL
Ratio) – RF Link 5 MHz Channel:
Test 2.2 Mbps 4.5 Mbps 9 Mbps 13.5 Mbps 18.1 Mbps
(up+down)

3
Maximum setting of Max capability parameter is 40 mi.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-23


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
20 MHz
5.8GHz Max. Channel: 18.6 Mbps 37.3 Mbps 74.5 Mbps 111.9 Mbps 149.1 Mbps
Aggregate (up+down)
Throughput with
1/16 Cyclic Prefix 10 MHz
and Frame Period Channel: 8.8 Mbps 17.4 Mbps 34.8 Mbps 52.2 Mbps 69.6 Mbps
5 ms to 1 SM (up+down)
(75%/25% DL/UL
Ratio) – RF Link
5 MHz Channel:
Test 3.8 Mbps 7.5 Mbps 15.2 Mbps 22.7 Mbps 30.3 Mbps
(up+down)

20 MHz
-82 dBm -82 dBm -75 dBm -69 dBm -60 dBm
Channel
5.8GHz Nominal
Per-Chain Receive 10 MHz
SM RX Sensitivity -84 dBm -84 dBm -77 dBm -71 dBm -63 dBm
Channel
(including FEC)4
5 MHz Channel -88 dBm -88 dBm -81 dBm -75 dBm -65 dBm

20 MHz
128.9 125.9 119 113 103.9
Channel
Link Budget, 10 MHz
Integrated (dB) 131.3 128.3 121.3 115.2 106.7
Channel

5 MHz Channel 134.5 131.5 124.7 118.6 108.6

4
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed
receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.

1-24 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 11 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 2.4 GHz

Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16-QAM- 64-QAM- 256-QAM-
Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with Integrated 22.1 mi / 15.7 mi / 7.6 mi / 3.6 mi / 5.7 1.7 mi /


2.4GHz Max. LOS SM antenna 35.4 km 25.1 km 12.1 km km 2.8 km
Link Budget (no
fade margin) – 20
MHz channel with Reflector
bandwidth Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 30.2 mi / 14.3 mi / 6.8 mi /
12 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 48.4 km 22.9 km 11.0 km
capability

with Integrated 30.8 mi / 21.8 mi / 9.7 mi / 4.9 mi / 7.8 2.4 mi /


2.4GHz Max. LOS SM antenna 49.3 km 34.9 km 15.6 km km 3.9 km
Link Budget (no
fade margin) – 10
MHz channel with Reflector
bandwidth Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 38.8 mi / 19.4 mi / 9.7 mi /
12 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 62.0 km 31.1 km 15.6 km
capability

with Integrated 40.0 mi / 31.5 mi / 15.2 mi / 6.8 mi / 2.8 mi /


2.4GHz Max. LOS SM antenna 64.0 km 50.3 km 24.4 km 10.9 km 4.5 km
Link Budget (no
fade margin) – 5
PMP 4505 MHz channel with Reflector
bandwidth Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 27.1 mi / 11.3 mi /
12 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 64.0 km 43.3 km 18.1 km
capability

20 MHz
2.4GHz Max. Channel: 16.2 Mbps 32.4 Mbps 64.7 Mbps 97.1 Mbps 129.5 Mbps
Aggregate (up+down)
Throughput with
1/16 Cyclic Prefix 10 MHz
and Frame Period Channel: 6.9 Mbps 13.9 Mbps 27.9 Mbps 41.8 Mbps 55.7 Mbps
2.5 ms to 1 SM (up+down)
(75%/25% DL/UL
Ratio) – RF Link 5 MHz Channel:
Test 2.2 Mbps 4.5 Mbps 9 Mbps 13.5 Mbps 18.1 Mbps
(up+down)

20 MHz
2.4GHz Max. Channel: 18.6 Mbps 37.3 Mbps 74.5 Mbps 111.9 Mbps 149.1 Mbps
Aggregate (up+down)
Throughput with
1/16 Cyclic Prefix 10 MHz
and Frame Period Channel: 8.8 Mbps 17.4 Mbps 34.8 Mbps 52.2 Mbps 69.6 Mbps
5 ms to 1 SM (up+down)
(75%/25% DL/UL
Ratio) – RF Link
5 MHz Channel:
Test 3.8 Mbps 7.5 Mbps 15.2 Mbps 22.7 Mbps 30.3 Mbps
(up+down)

5
Maximum setting of Max capability parameter is 40 mi.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-25


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
20 MHz
-85 dBm -85 dBm -79 dBm -72 dBm -66 dBm
2.4GHz Nominal Channel
Per-Chain
10 MHz
Receive SM RX -88 dBm -88 dBm -81 dBm -75 dBm -69 dBm
Channel
Sensitivity
(including FEC)6
5 MHz Channel -91 dBm -91 dBm -85 dBm -78 dBm -70 dBm

20 MHz
131.3 128.3 122 115.5 109.1
Channel
Link Budget, 10 MHz
134.2 131.2 124.2 118.2 112.2
Integrated (dB) Channel

5 MHz Channel 137.4 134.4 128.1 121.1 113.5

6
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (-45 deg.) and Channel B (+45 deg.). Listed
receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.

1-26 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 12 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.5 GHz

Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16-QAM- 64-QAM- 256-QAM-
Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with
18.7 mi / 13.2 mi / 6.5 mi / 2.9 mi / 4.7 1.0 mi /
3.5GHz Max. LOS Integrated
29.9 km 21.1 km 10.5 km km 1.6 km
Link Budget (no SM antenna
fade margin) – 20
MHz channel with Reflector
bandwidth Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 23.2 mi / 10.4 mi / 3.6 mi /
11 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 37.2 km 16.6 km 5.8 km
capability

with
28.1 mi / 19.9 mi / 8.9 mi / 4.8 mi / 1.5 mi /
3.5GHz Max. LOS Integrated
44.9 km 31.8 km 14.2 km 7.7 km 2.4 km
Link Budget (no SM antenna
fade margin) – 10
MHz channel with Reflector
bandwidth Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 31.6 mi / 17.0 mi / 5.3 mi /
11 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 50.5 km 27.2 km 8.4 km
capability

with
33.1 mi / 23.5 mi / 10.5 mi / 5.2 mi / 8.3 2.0 mi /
3.5GHz Max. LOS Integrated
53.0 km 37.5 km 16.8 km km 3.2 km
Link Budget (no SM antenna
fade margin) – 7
MHz channel with Reflector
bandwidth Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 37.2 mi / 18.4 mi / 7.2 mi /
7
PMP 450 11 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 59.5 km 29.5 km 11.5 km
capability

with
40.0 mi / 29.2 mi / 14.6 mi / 6.5 mi / 2.1 mi /
3.5GHz Max. LOS Integrated
64.0 km 46.7 km 23.4 km 10.5 km 3.3 km
Link Budget (no SM antenna
fade margin) – 5
MHz channel with Reflector
bandwidth Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 23.2 mi / 7.4 mi /
11 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 64.0 km 37.1 km 11.9 km
capability

20 MHz
Channel: 16.6 Mbps 33.2 Mbps 66.4 Mbps 99.5 Mbps 132.7 Mbps
(up+down)
3.5GHz Max.
Aggregate 10 MHz
Throughput with Channel: 7.1 Mbps 14.3 Mbps 28.7 Mbps 43 Mbps 57.3 Mbps
1/16 Cyclic Prefix (up+down)
and Frame Period
2.5 ms to 1 SM 7 MHz
(75%/25% DL/UL Channel: 4.5 Mbps 9.1 Mbps 18 Mbps 27.1 Mbps 36 Mbps
Ratio) – RF Link (up+down)
Test
5 MHz
Channel: 2.4 Mbps 4.9 Mbps 9.9 Mbps 14.7 Mbps 19.7 Mbps
(up+down)

7
Maximum setting of Max capability parameter is 40 mi.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-27


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
20 MHz
Channel: 18.8 Mbps 37.7 Mbps 75.3 Mbps 113.1 Mbps 150.7 Mbps
(up+down)
3.5GHz Max.
Aggregate 10 MHz
Throughput with Channel: 8.9 Mbps 17.6 Mbps 35.2 Mbps 52.8 Mbps 70.4 Mbps
1/16 Cyclic Prefix (up+down)
and Frame Period
5 ms to 1 SM 7 MHz
(75%/25% DL/UL Channel: 6 Mbps 12.1 Mbps 24.1 Mbps 36.2 Mbps 48.3 Mbps
Ratio) – RF Link (up+down)
Test
5 MHz
Channel: 3.9 Mbps 7.7 Mbps 15.6 Mbps 23.3 Mbps 31.1 Mbps
(up+down)

20 MHz
-85 dBm -85 dBm -79 dBm -72 dBm -65 dBm
Channel

3.5GHz Nominal 10 MHz


-88 dBm -88 dBm -81 dBm -76 dBm -68 dBm
Per-Chain Receive Channel
SM RX Sensitivity 7 MHz
(including FEC)8 -90 dBm -90 dBm -83 dBm -77 dBm -71 dBm
Channel

5 MHz
-92 dBm -92 dBm -86 dBm -79 dBm -71 dBm
Channel

20 MHz
133.1 130.1 124 117 107.9
Channel

10 MHz
136.66 133.66 126.68 121.3 111.1
Link Budget, Channel
Integrated (dB) 7 MHz
138.1 135.1 128.1 122 113.8
Channel

5 MHz
140 137 131 124 114.1
Channel

8
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (-45 deg.) and Channel B (+45 deg.). Listed
receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.

1-28 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 13 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 3.6 GHz


Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16-QAM- 64-QAM- 256-QAM-
Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

3.6GHz Max. with Integrated 20.3 mi / 14.4 mi / 5.7 mi / 2.6 mi / 0.8 mi /


LOS Link Budget SM antenna 32.5 km 23.0 km 9.2 km 4.1 km 1.3 km
(no fade margin)
– 20 MHz with Reflector
channel Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 20.3 mi / 9.1 mi / 2.9 mi /
bandwidth 11 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 32.5 km 14.5 km 4.6 km
capability

3.6GHz Max. with Integrated 21.2 mi / 15.0 mi / 7.0 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.1 mi /


LOS Link Budget SM antenna 34.0 km 24.1 km 11.3 km 5.4 km 1.8 km
(no fade margin)
– 10 MHz with Reflector
channel Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 24.9 mi / 12.0 mi / 4.0 mi /
bandwidth 11 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 39.9 km 19.1 km 6.5 km
capability

with Integrated 27.0 mi / 19.1 mi / 8.5 mi / 3.8 mi / 1.2 mi /


3.6GHz Max. SM antenna 43.3 km 30.6 km 13.7 km 6.1 km 2.0 km
LOS Link Budget
(no fade margin)
– 7 MHz channel with Reflector
bandwidth Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 30.3 mi / 13.5 mi / 4.4 mi /
11 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 48.5 km 21.7 km 7.1 km
capability
PMP 4509
with Integrated 32.1 mi / 22.7 mi / 10.2 mi / 4.5 mi / 1.4 mi /
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna 51.4 km 36.4 km 16.3 km 7.3 km 2.2 km
LOS Link Budget
(no fade margin) with Reflector
– 5 MHz channel Dish that adds 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 36.0 mi / 16.1 mi / 4.8 mi /
bandwidth 11 dB to SM 64.0 km 64.0 km 57.7 km 25.8 km 7.7 km
capability
20 MHz
Channel: 16.6 Mbps 33.2 Mbps 66.4 Mbps 99.5 Mbps 132.7 Mbps
3.6GHz Max. (up+down)
Aggregate 10 MHz
Throughput with Channel: 7.1 Mbps 14.3 Mbps 28.7 Mbps 43 Mbps 57.3 Mbps
1/16 Cyclic Prefix (up+down)
and Frame
Period 2.5 ms to 7 MHz
1 SM (75%/25% Channel: 4.5 Mbps 9.1 Mbps 18 Mbps 27.1 Mbps 36 Mbps
DL/UL Ratio) – (up+down)
RF Link Test 5 MHz
Channel: 2.4 Mbps 4.9 Mbps 9.9 Mbps 14.7 Mbps 19.7 Mbps
(up+down)
3.6GHz Max. 20 MHz
Aggregate Channel: 18.8 Mbps 37.7 Mbps 75.3 Mbps 113.1 Mbps 150.7 Mbps
Throughput with (up+down)
1/16 Cyclic Prefix
and Frame
Period 5 ms to 1 10 MHz
SM (75%/25% Channel: 8.9 Mbps 17.6 Mbps 35.2 Mbps 52.8 Mbps 70.4 Mbps
DL/UL Ratio) – (up+down)
RF Link Test

9
Maximum setting of Max capability parameter is 40 mi.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-29


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
7 MHz
Channel: 6 Mbps 12.1 Mbps 24.1 Mbps 36.2 Mbps 48.3 Mbps
(up+down)
5 MHz
Channel: 3.9 Mbps 7.7 Mbps 15.6 Mbps 23.3 Mbps 31.1 Mbps
(up+down)
20 MHz
-86 dBm -86 dBm -78 dBm -71 dBm -63 dBm
Channel
3.6GHz Nominal 10 MHz
Per-Chain -86 dBm -86 dBm -80 dBm -73 dBm -66 dBm
Channel
Receive SM RX
Sensitivity 7 MHz Channel -89 dBm -89 dBm -82 dBm -75 dBm -67 dBm
(including FEC)10

5 MHz Channel -90 dBm -90 dBm -83 dBm -76 dBm -68 dBm

20 MHz
134.3 131.3 123.3 116.3 106.3
Channel
10 MHz
134.7 131.7 125.1 118.71 109.3
Link Budget, Channel
Integrated (dB)
7 MHz Channel 136.8 133.8 126.8 119.8 110.1

5 MHz Channel 138.3 135.3 128.3 121.3 110.8

10
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (-45 deg.) and Channel B (+45 deg.). Listed
receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.

1-30 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 14 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.4 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430
SM
Performance Details
Product Parameter11
1x 2x 3x
Modulation QPSK-SISO 16-QAM-SISO 64-QAM-SISO

5.4GHz Max. with Integrated 6.6 mi / 2.4 mi / 1.0 mi /


LOS Link SM antenna 10.6 km 3.9 km 1.6 km
Budget (no fade with Reflector
margin) – 20 Dish that adds 10.5 mi / 3.8 mi / 1.6 mi /
MHz channel 14 dB to SM 16.7 km 6.1 km 2.6 km
bandwidth capability

5.4GHz Max. with Integrated 9.7 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.6 mi /


LOS Link SM antenna 15.4 km 5.4 km 2.6 km
Budget (no fade with Reflector
margin) – 10 Dish that adds 15.3 mi / 5.4 mi / 2.6 mi /
MHz channel 14 dB to SM 24.5 km 8.6 km 4.2 km
bandwidth capability

5.4GHz Max. with Integrated 13.9 mi / 4.5 mi / 2.2 mi /


LOS Link SM antenna 22.3 km 7.1 km 3.6 km
Budget (no fade with Reflector
margin) – 5 Dish that adds 22.1 mi / 7.1 mi / 3.5 mi /
MHz channel 14 dB to SM 35.3 km 11.3 km 5.7 km
bandwidth capability
PMP 450 AP12
5.4GHz Max. 20 MHz
PMP 430 SM
Aggregate Channel: 16.2 Mbps 32.4 Mbps 48.5 Mbps
Throughput (up+down)
with 1/16 Cyclic
10 MHz
Prefix and
Channel: 6.9 Mbps 13.9 Mbps 20.9 Mbps
Frame Period
(up+down)
2.5 ms to 1 SM
(75%/25%
5 MHz Channel:
DL/UL Ratio) – 2.2 Mbps 4.5 Mbps 6.8 Mbps
(up+down)
RF Link Test
5.4GHz Nominal 20 MHz
-87 dBm -80 dBm -74 dBm
Per-Chain Channel
Receive SM RX 10 MHz
Sensitivity -89 dBm -83 dBm -77 dBm
Channel
(including
FEC)13 5 MHz Channel -94 dBm -87 dBm -80 dBm

20 MHz
131 122 115
Channel
Link Budget,
Integrated (dB) 10 MHz
134 125 119
Channel

5 MHz Channel 138 128 122

11
There would be a combining gain at the AP (nominal value 3 dB)
12
Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi. Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory
requirements.
13
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed
receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-31


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 15 Link Budget Details – Dynamic Rate Adapt, 5.8GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM
Performance Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 3x

Modulation QPSK-SISO 16-QAM-SISO 64-QAM-SISO

5.8GHz Max. with Integrated 7.0 mi / 2.3 mi / 1.1 mi /


LOS Link SM antenna 11.3 km 3.6 km 1.8 km
Budget (no fade with Reflector
margin) – 20 Dish that adds 11.2 mi / 3.6 mi / 1.8 mi /
MHz channel 14 dB to SM 17.9 km 5.7 km 2.9 km
bandwidth capability

5.8GHz Max. with Integrated 9.3 mi / 2.9 mi / 1.5 mi /


LOS Link SM antenna 14.9 km 4.7 km 2.3 km
Budget (no fade with Reflector
margin) – 10 Dish that adds 14.7 mi / 4.7 mi / 2.3 mi /
MHz channel 14 dB to SM 23.5 km 7.4 km 3.7 km
bandwidth capability

5.8GHz Max. with Integrated 13.4 mi / 4.3 mi / 2.2 mi /


LOS Link SM antenna 21.5 km 6.9 km 3.4 km
Budget (no fade with Reflector
margin) – 5 Dish that adds 21.3 mi / 6.9 mi / 3.4 mi /
MHz channel 14 dB to SM 34.0 km 11.0 km 5.5 km
14
PMP 450 AP bandwidth capability
PMP 430 SM 20 MHz
5.8GHz Max.
Aggregate Channel: 16.2 Mbps 32.4 Mbps 48.5 Mbps
Throughput (up+down)
with 1/16 Cyclic
10 MHz
Prefix and
Channel: 6.9 Mbps 13.9 Mbps 20.9 Mbps
Frame Period
(up+down)
2.5 ms to 1 SM
(75%/25%
5 MHz Channel:
DL/UL Ratio) – 2.2 Mbps 4.5 Mbps 6.8 Mbps
(up+down)
RF Link Test
5.8GHz Nominal 20 MHz
-87 dBm -80 dBm -74 dBm
Per-Chain Channel
Receive SM RX 10 MHz
Sensitivity -89 dBm -83 dBm -77 dBm
Channel
(including
FEC)15 5 MHz Channel -94 dBm -87 dBm -80 dBm
20 MHz
132 122 116
Channel
Link Budget, 10 MHz
Integrated (dB) 134 124 118
Channel
5 MHz Channel 138 128 122

14
Maximum setting of Max Range parameter is 40 mi.
15
PMP 450 devices include a dual polar antenna; Channel A (Vertical) and Channel B (Horizontal). Listed
receive sensitivity corresponds to single-channel readings.

1-32 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Adaptive modulation
PMP 450 units can transport data over the wireless link using a number of different
modulation modes. The radio automatically selects MIMO-A and MIMO-B modes, based on
the RF environment to provide 1x, 2x, 3x, 4x, 6x and 8x operation.

MIMO
Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) techniques provide protection against fading and
increase the probability that the receiver will decode a usable signal. When the effects of
MIMO are combined with those of OFDM techniques and a high link budget, there is a high
probability of a robust connection over a non-line-of-sight path.
The sub-features that comprise the MIMO technique utilized in the PMP 450 product are:
 Matrix A: This technique enables the PMP 450 radio to use a scheme that tries to
optimize coverage by transmitting the same data over both antennas. This redundancy
improves the signal to noise ratio at the receiver making it more robust, at the cost of
throughput.
 Matrix B: This technique provides for the ability to double the throughput of a radio
transmission under proper RF conditions. Different data streams are transmitted
simultaneously on two different antennas.

Cyclic Prefix
OFDM technology uses a cyclic prefix, where a portion of the end of a symbol (slot) is
repeated at the beginning of the symbol (slot) to allow multi-pathing to settle before
receiving the desired data. A 1/16 cyclic prefix means that for every 16 bits of throughput
data transmitted, an additional bit is used.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-33


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Encryption
The Cambium PMP 450 Series supports optional encryption for data transmitted over the
wireless link. The PMP 450 Series supports the following forms of encryption for security of
the wireless link:
 DES (Data Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses
secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations,
substitutions, and recombination operations on blocks of data. DES encryption does not
affect the performance or throughput of the system.
 AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that
uses the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security than
DES. AES products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing
Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A.

Further reading on wireless operation


For information on planning wireless operation, see Regulatory planning on page 2-2 that
describes the regulatory restrictions which affect radio spectrum usage such as frequency
range.

1-34 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

System management
This section introduces the PMP 450 management system, including the Web Interface,
Installation, Configuration, Alerts and Upgrades and Management Software.

Management agent
PMP 450 equipment is managed through an embedded management agent. Management
workstations, network management systems or PCs can be connected to this agent using
the module’s Ethernet port or over-the air (SM).
The management agent supports the following interfaces:
 Hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP)
 RADIUS authentication
 Simple network management protocol (SNMP)
 Network time protocol (NTP)
 System logging (Syslog)
 Wireless Manager (WM) software
 Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT) software

Web server
The PMP 450 management agent contains a web server. The web server supports access via
the HTTP interface.
Web-based management offers a convenient way to manage the PMP 450 equipment from a
locally connected computer or from a network management workstation connected through
a management network, without requiring any special management software. The web-
based interfaces are the only interfaces supported for installation of PMP 450 and for the
majority of PMP 450 configuration management tasks.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-35


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 14 AP web-based management screenshot

1-36 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Web pages
The web-based management interfaces provide comprehensive web-based fault,
configuration, performance and security management functions organized into the following
web-pages and groups:
Access Point web-pages:
 Home: The Home web-page reports the general device status, session status, remote
subscriber status, event log information, network interface status and Layer 2 Neighbor
information.
 Configuration: The Configuration web-page may be utilized for configuring general
device parameters, as well as IP, radio, SNMP, Quality of Service (QoS), security, time,
VLAN, DiffServ, protocol filtering, and unit settings.
 Statistics: The Statistics web-page reports detailed operating statistics for the
scheduler, SM registration failures, bridge control block, bridging table, Ethernet, radio,
VLAN, data VC, throughput, filter, ARP, overload, DHCP relay, pass through and DNS.
 Tools: The Tools web-page offers useful tools for device installation, configuration, and
operation including link capacity test, frame calculator, subscriber configuration, link
status, remote spectrum analyzer, sessions, and DNS test.
 Logs: The Logs web-page displays logs related to device operation including AP
sessions, AP authentication state machine, AP authorization state machine, and EAP
Radius.
 Accounts: These web-pages are used to configure device user accounts.
 Quick Start: The Quick Start web-page provides a walkthrough of configuring radio
parameters for initial operation.
 Copyright: The Copyright web-page displays pertinent device copyright information.

Subscriber Module web-pages:


 Home: The Home web-page reports the general device status, event log information,
network interface status, and the Layer 2 Neighbor information.
 Configuration: The Configuration web-page may be utilized for configuring general
device parameters, as well as IP, radio, SNMP, Quality of Service (QoS), security, VLAN,
DiffServ, protocol filtering, NAT, PPPoE, NAT port mapping, and unit settings.
 Statistics: The Statistics web-page reports detailed operating statistics for the
scheduler, bridge control block, bridging table, translation table, Ethernet, radio, VLAN,
data VC, filter, NAT, NAT DHCP, ARP, overload, PPPoE, peer information, and DNS.
 Tools: The Tools web-page offers useful tools for device installation, configuration, and
operation including a spectrum analyzer, alignment configuration and tool, link capacity
test, AP evaluation, frame calculator, BER results, link status, and DNS test.
 Logs: The Logs web-page displays logs related to device operation including the NAT
table, SM session, SM authentication, SM authorization, PPPoE session, and EAP Radius.
 Accounts: These web-pages are used to configure device user accounts.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-37


PMP 450 Planning Guide

 PDA: The PDA web-page includes 320 x 240 pixel formatted displays of information
important to installation and alignment for installers using legacy PDA devices. All
device web pages are compatible with touch devices such as smart phones and tablets.
 Copyright: The Copyright web-page displays pertinent device copyright information.

Identity-based user accounts


When identity-based user accounts are configured, a security officer can define from one to
four user accounts, each of which may have one of the four possible roles:
 ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of the root
and admin users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one of them creates.
 INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR except that the
installer cannot add or delete users or change the password of any other user.
 TECHNICIAN, who has permissions to modify basic radio parameters and view
informational web pages
 GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status tab
See Table 58 on page 2-82 and Table 59 on page 2-84 for detailed information on account
permissions.

Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)


The PMP 450 system includes support for RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User
Service) protocol functionality including:
 Authentication: Allows only known SMs onto the network (blocking “rogue” SMs), and
can be configured to ensure SMs are connecting to a known network (preventing SMs
from connecting to “rogue” APs). RADIUS authentication is used for SMs, but not used
for APs.
 SM Configuration: Configures authenticated SMs with MIR (Maximum Information
Rate), High Priority, and VLAN (Virtual LAN) parameters from the RADIUS server when
a SM registers to an AP.
 SM Accounting provides support for RADIUS accounting messages for usage-based
billing. This accounting includes indications for subscriber session establishment,
subscriber session disconnection, and bandwidth usage per session for each SM that
connects to the AP.
 Centralized AP and SM user name and password management: Allows AP and SM
usernames and access levels (Administrator, Installer, Technician and Read-Only) to be
centrally administered in the RADIUS server instead of on each radio and tracks access
events (logon/logoff) for each username on the RADIUS server. This accounting does not
track and report specific configuration actions performed on radios or pull statistics
such as bit counts from the radios. Such functions require an Element Management
System (EMS) such as Cambium Wireless Manager. This accounting is not the ability to
perform accounting functions on the subscriber/end user/customer account.
 Framed-IP-Address: Operators may use a RADIUS server to assign management IP
addressing to SM modules.

1-38 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

SNMP
The management agent supports fault and performance management by means of an SNMP
interface. The management agent is compatible with SNMP v1, SNMP v2c and SNMP v3
using 5 Management Information Base (MIB) files which are available for download from
the Cambium Networks Support website
(https://support.cambiumnetworks.com/files/pmp450).

Network Time Protocol (NTP)


The clock supplies accurate date and time information to the system. It can be set to run
with or without a connection to a network time server (NTP). It can be configured to display
local time by setting the time zone and daylight saving in the Time web page. If NTP server
connection is available, the clock can be set to synchronize with the server time at regular
intervals. PMP 450 devices may receive NTP data from a CMM3 or CMM4 module, a NTP
server configured in the system’s management network or a UGPS module.
The Time Zone option is configurable on the AP’s Time Configuration page, and may be used
to offset the received NTP time to match the operator’s local time zone. When set on the
AP, the offset is set for the entire sector (SMs are notified of the current Time Zone upon
initial registration). If a Time Zone change is applied, the SMs are notified of the change in
a best effort fashion, meaning some SMs may not pick up the change until the next re-
registration. Time Zone changes are noted in the Event Log of the AP and SM.
An AP which is receiving NTP date and time information from an NTP server or from a GPS
synchronization source may be used as an NTP server. Any client which has IP connectivity
to the AP may request NTP date and time information from the AP. No additional
configuration (other than the AP receiving valid NTP data) is required to use the AP as an
NTP server.

Wireless Manager (WM)


Cambium Networks Wireless Manager 4.0 is recommended for managing PMP 450
networks. You can achieve better uptime through better visibility of your network with the
Cambium Wireless Manager. This network management software tool offers breakthrough
map-based visualization capabilities using embedded Google maps, and combined with
advanced configuration, provisioning, alerting and reporting features you can control your
entire outdoor wireless network including Point-to-Multipoint and Point-to-Point solutions as
well as other SNMP enabled devices. With its powerful user interface you are not only able
to control your network's access, distribution and backhaul layers, but you will also have
visibility to WLAN sites and be able to quickly launch indoor network management systems.
Some key features of Wireless Manager are:
 Template-Based Configuration: With Wireless Manager's user-defined templates you
can accelerate the process for the configuration of the devices you add to your network
resulting in quicker and easier deployments. The template-based functionality provides
an automated way to configure large numbers of network devices with just a few mouse
clicks, and can be scheduled to occur at any time via Wireless Manager's Task
Scheduler.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-39


PMP 450 Planning Guide

 Ultralight Thin Client: With the growing mobile workforce it is important to have
access to the status of your network at any time. With Wireless Manager you can view
the status and performance of your entire wireless network via a compact web interface
accessible by your smart phone.
 Map-Based Visualization: Wireless Manager Overlays sophisticated real-time
information about your network elements onto building layouts and dynamic Google
maps. Visuals can be scaled to view an entire city or building or a specific area, floor or
link.
 High Availability Architecture Support: Wireless Manager offers a high availability
option, providing a reliable and redundant network management solution that ensures
there is always a management access to your network.
 High Scalability: The enhanced Wireless Manager offers you server scalability with
support for up to 10,000 nodes as well as support for distributed server architecture.
Cambium’s Wireless Manager 4.0 available for download at:
http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/wireless-manager/

Canopy Network Updater Tool (CNUT)


CNUT (Canopy Network Updater Tool) is the stand-alone software update tool for PMP 450
Series products.
The Canopy Network Updater Tool has the following features:
 Automatically discovers all network elements
 CNUT supports HTTP and HTTPs
 Executes a UDP command that initiates and terminates the Auto-update mode within
APs. This command is both secure and convenient:
o For security, the AP accepts this command from only the IP address that you specify
in the Configuration page of the AP.
o For convenience, Network Updater automatically sets this Configuration parameter
in the APs to the IP address of the Network Updater server when the server performs
any of the update commands.
 Allows you to choose the following among updating:
o Your entire network.
o Only elements that you select.
o Only network branches that you select.
 Provides a Script Engine that you can use with any script which:
o You define.
o Cambium supplies.
CNUT is available at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/cnut/

Capacity upgrades
Capacity upgrades are supplied as an access key purchased from your Cambium Point-to-
Multipoint distributor or solutions provider. The upgrade is applied by entering the supplied
URL in a PMP 450 module-connected web browser address bar.

1-40 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Software upgrade
CNUT (Canopy Network Updater Tool) is the stand-alone software update tool for PMP 450
Series products.
CNUT is available at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/management-tools/cnut/

Further reading on system management


For more information on system management, see Security planning on page 2-81 describes
how to plan for PMP 450 links to operate in secure modes.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 1-41


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Chapter 2: Planning considerations


This chapter provides information to help the user to plan a PMP 450 network.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
 Regulatory planning on page 2-2 describes how to plan PMP 450 links to conform to the
regulatory restrictions that apply in the country of operation.
 Network migration planning on page 2-3 presents migration scenarios to aid in planning
a network deployment
 Site planning on page 2-12 describes factors to be considered when choosing sites for
the equipment
 Link planning on page 2-13 describes factors to be taken into account when planning
links, such as range, path loss and throughput.
 Analyzing the RF Environment on page 2-48 describes how to map RF neighbor
frequencies, anticipate reflection, assess RF obstructions in the Fresnel Zone, and plan
channel usage.
 Selecting Sites for Network Elements on page 2-57 describes how to survey sites, find
expected coverage areas, clear the radio horizon, and calculate aim angles.
 Diagramming Network Layouts on page 2-60 includes tips on how to avoid self-
interference as well as interference from external sources.
 Grounding and lightning protection on page 2-62 discusses wiring standards, the need
for surge protection, lightning protection zones, and general protection requirements.
 Configuration options for TDD synchronization on page 2-69 covers the importance of
GPS synchronization as well as planning for installation
 Data network planning on page 2-73 discusses IP networking and other networking
features provided with the PMP 450 product
 Security planning on page 2-81 can be referenced for information regarding security
features of the product.
PMP 450 Planning Guide

Regulatory planning
This section describes how to plan PMP 450 links to conform to the regulatory restrictions
that apply in the country of operation.

It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the PMP product is operated in
accordance with local regulatory limits.

Contact the applicable radio regulator to find out whether or not registration of the
PMP network is required.

Obeying Regulatory limits


The local regulator may restrict frequency usage and channel width, and may limit the
amount of conducted or radiated transmitter power. Some countries impose conducted
power limits on products operating in the 2.4 GHz, 3.5GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz
bands. For more information, see Compliance with radio regulations on page 4-19.

Conforming to the limits


Ensure the system is configured to conform to local regulatory requirements by setting the
appropriate Country Code setting on the APs and SMs in the network. When using
connectorized APs or SMs with external antennas, the regulations may require the
maximum transmit power to be reduced. To ensure that regulatory requirements are met
for connectorized installations, see Calculating maximum power level for connectorized
units on page 2-20.

2-2 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Network migration planning


The PMP 450 Series offers current network operators the ability to migrate to PMP 450 for
expanded network capacity and capability. The following sections are provided to aid in
establishing a planning framework for deploying a PMP 450 system.

Example PMP 450 deployment scenario


The following sections detail example network deployment scenarios for the PMP 450
product. This table may be referenced to begin planning the PMP 450 deployment based on
the current network configuration (if applicable).

Definitions of deployment scenario terminology


Table 16 Deployment scenario terminology descriptions

Term Definition

Existing System Release The current running system software release

The total number of AP sectors co-located in the


Existing Number of Sectors
current system

The type of modulation used in the current


network. “FSK” indicates an existing PMP 1x0
Existing Modulation
series network, and “OFDM” indicates an
existing PMP 430 network.

The current deployment’s usage of frequency


across tower sectors. For example, in a six AP
sector deployment, the following represents an
ABC frequency re-use pattern.
 Sector 1 (A): 5740
 Sector 2 (B): 5760
 Sector 3 (C): 5780
Existing Frequency Re-use  Sector 4 (A): 5740
Pattern  Sector 5 (B): 5760
 Sector 6 (C): 5780
The deployment scenarios define their own
customized examples of frequency re-use
patterns.
For multiple AP cluster deployments, see
Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters on page
2-51

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-3


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

The channel size, or channel bandwidth used in


the current system. For FSK (PMP 1x0 series)
deployments, the channel bandwidth is always
Existing Ch BW (MHz) 20 MHz (except 900 MHz FSK, which operate
with 8 MHz channel bandwidth). For OFDM
(PMP 430) deployments, the channel size may
be 5, 10, or 20 MHz.

Existing Total Bandwidth Used The total amount of spectrum, in MHz, which is
(MHz) used by the existing system.

Existing Aggregate Tower The total amount of throughput, in Mbps,


Throughput (Mbps) available in the current network deployment.

The number of additional frequencies unused


Existing Additional Frequencies
by the current deployment that are available for
Available (MHz)
usage by PMP 450 equipment.

FINAL: Aggregate Throughput The aggregate throughput available after


(Mbps) upgrading to a PMP 450 network.

The number of sectors configured in the new


Resulting Number of Sectors
PMP 450 network installation.

The modulation scheme utilized in the new PMP


Resulting Modulation
450 network installation.

The new frequency re-use pattern utilized in


Resulting Frequency Re-use the new PMP 450 network installation. Each
Pattern deployment scenario in this section includes a
custom example of a frequency re-use plan.

The resulting channel bandwidth configured in


Resulting Ch BW (MHz)
the PMP 450 system.

Resulting Total Bandwidth Used The total amount of spectrum which is used by
(MHz) the existing system.

Resulting Aggregate Tower The aggregate throughput available after


Throughput (Mbps) upgrading to a PMP 450 network.

The amount of increase in tower (all sectors)


Resulting Percentage Increase in
throughput after upgrading to a PMP 450
Aggregate Tower Throughput
network.

Total Bandwidth Used (During The total amount of spectrum (in MHz) used
Migration) (MHz) when migrating to a PMP 450 deployments.

2-4 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Sector capacity
The following table exhibits the maximum aggregate sector throughput for several
Cambium network deployments. This table may be used as a reference for planning new
networks or for planning network upgrades.

Table 17 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – FSK (PMP 1x0 Series)

Rate Ch BW Cyclic Maximum Aggregate


Air Interface Adapt (MHz) Prefix Sector Throughput -
RF Link Test (Mbps)

FSK (PMP 1x0 Series – 900


MHz) 1x 8 N/A 2.4

FSK (PMP 1x0 Series – 900


MHz) 2x 8 N/A 4.8

FSK (PMP 1x0 Series) 1x 20 N/A 7

FSK (PMP 1x0 Series) 2x 20 N/A 14

Table 18 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM (PMP 430 Series)

Rate Ch BW Cyclic Maximum Aggregate


Air Interface Adapt (MHz) Prefix Sector Throughput -
RF Link Test (Mbps)

OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 1x 5 CP 1/16 3.5


OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 2x 5 CP 1/16 7
OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 3x 5 CP 1/16 10.5
OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 1x 10 CP 1/16 7.5
OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 2x 10 CP 1/16 15
OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 3x 10 CP 1/16 22.5
OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 1x 20 CP 1/16 16.5
OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 2x 20 CP 1/16 32
OFDM (PMP 430 Series) 3x 20 CP 1/16 45+

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-5


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 19 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – OFDM MIMO-B (PMP 450 Series)

Rate Ch BW Cyclic Maximum


Adapt (MHz) Prefix Aggregate Sector
Air Interface
Throughput - RF
Link Test (Mbps)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
2x 5 CP 1/16 4
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
4x 5 CP 1/16 8
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
6x 5 CP 1/16 14
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
8x 5 CP 1/16 18
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
2x 10 CP 1/16 13
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
4x 10 CP 1/16 26
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
6x 10 CP 1/16 42
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
8x 10 CP 1/16 55
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
2x 20 CP 1/16 30
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
4x 20 CP 1/16 60
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
6x 20 CP 1/16 98
Series)
OFDM (MIMO) (PMP 450
8x 20 CP 1/16 128
Series)

The corresponding MIMO-A modulation achieves half the


throughput,

2-6 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 20 Examples of aggregate sector throughput – PMP 450 AP to PMP 430 SM

Rate Ch Cyclic Maximum Aggregate


Air Interface Adapt BW Prefix Sector Throughput -
(MHz) RF Link Test (Mbps)

OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP CP


430 SM) 1x 5 1/16 2
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP CP
430 SM) 2x 5 1/16 4
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP CP
430 SM) 3x 5 1/16 7
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP CP
430 SM) 1x 10 1/16 6
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP CP
430 SM) 2x 10 1/16 12
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP CP
430 SM) 3x 10 1/16 20
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP CP
430 SM) 1x 20 1/16 13
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP CP
430 SM) 2x 20 1/16 28
OFDM (PMP 450 AP to PMP CP
430 SM) 3x 20 1/16 48

Deployment scenario 1 – Replacing PMP 100 Equipment (20 MHz


Channel Bandwidth)
Deployment scenario 1 assumes that the existing network is comprised of PMP 1x0
equipment (PMP 100, PMP 120, etc.), with the configuration listed below in Table 21. The
migration in this scenario results in a complete replacement of PMP 1x0 series equipment
with PMP 450 equipment.
Scenario 1 assumes that neighbouring frequencies are free and that a guard band is not
required at the edges of the spectrum used for transmission.
Table 21 Deployment scenario 1

Term Definition

Existing System Release 12.1

Existing Number of Sectors 6

Existing Modulation FSK

Existing Frequency Re-use Pattern ABC ABC

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-7


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

Existing Ch BW (MHz) 20

Existing Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps) 84

Existing Total Bandwidth Used (MHz) 60

Existing Additional Frequencies Available


10
(MHz)

Replace Legacy Subscribers with 450 SMs Required

Resulting Number of Sectors 6


OFDM
Resulting Modulation (MIMO)

Resulting Frequency Re-use Pattern ABC ABC

Resulting Ch BW (MHz) 20

Resulting Total Bandwidth Used (MHz) 60

Resulting Aggregate Tower Throughput (Mbps) 570

Resulting Percentage Increase in Aggregate


679%
Tower Throughput

Table 22 Scenario 1 spectrum usage

Beginning Resulting frequency usage (assuming


frequency usage no interference at band edges)

5725
5730

5735

5740 FSK (A) MIMO (A) 5.740 GHz

5745

5750

5755

5760 FSK (B) MIMO (B) 5.760 GHz

5765

5770

5775

5780 FSK (C) MIMO (C) 5.780 GHz

2-8 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

5785

5790
5795
5800

Deployment scenario 1 migration procedure


This procedure assumes that there are no temporary frequencies available and that the PMP
450 APs will replace the existing APs.
Procedure 1 Deployment scenario 1 migration procedure

1 Identify proximity to potential system interferers by running a spectrum analysis


scan where the PMP 450 equipment is deployed. It is recommended to run this
scan at several different times of day and night
2 Record relevant AP and SM configuration parameters within the current
operating network, if applicable, including:
 Authentication and authorization parameters
 Frequency configuration
 Data network configuration
 RF statistics
 Security configuration
3 Configure the PMP 450 AP and SMs for deployment
4 Install the PMP 450 AP
5 Install the PMP 450 MIMO(frequency A) SMs – powered on
6 Verify SM registration, link quality, and link performance.
7 Continue installation for frequency B sector and frequency C sector.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-9


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Deployment scenario 2 – Replacing PMP 430 equipment (10 MHz


Channel Bandwidth)
Deployment scenario 2 assumes that the existing network is comprised of PMP 430
equipment with the configuration listed below in Table 23. The migration in this scenario
results in a complete replacement of PMP 430 series equipment with PMP 450 equipment.
Table 23 Deployment scenario 2

Term Definition

Existing System Release 12.2.2

Existing Number of Sectors 6

Existing Modulation OFDM

Existing Frequency Re-use Pattern ABC ABC

Existing Ch BW (MHz) 10

Existing Aggregate Tower Throughput


135
(Mbps)

Existing Total Bandwidth Used (MHz) 30

Existing Additional Frequencies


0
Available (MHz)

Replace Legacy Subscribers with 450 Optional (PMP 430 Interop enables PMP
SMs 430 SMs to register to PMP 450 AP)

Resulting Number of Sectors 6

Resulting Modulation OFDM (MIMO)

Resulting Frequency Re-use Pattern ABC ABC

Resulting Ch BW (MHz) 10

Resulting Total Bandwidth Used (MHz) 30

Resulting Aggregate Tower Throughput


234
(Mbps)

Resulting Percentage Increase in


173%
Aggregate Tower Throughput

2-10 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 24 Deployment scenario 2 spectrum usage

Beginning PMP 430


frequency usage Resulting PMP 450 frequency usage

5725

5730

5735

5740 OFDM (A) MIMO (A) 5.740 GHz

5745

5750 OFDM (B) MIMO (B) 5.750 GHz

5755

5760 OFDM (C) MIMO (C) 5.760 GHz

5765

5770

Deployment scenario 2 migration procedure


This procedure assumes that there are no temporary frequencies available and that the PMP
450 APs will replace the existing APs.
Procedure 2 Deployment scenario 2 migration procedure

1 Identify proximity to potential system interferers by running a spectrum analysis


scan where the PMP 450 equipment is deployed. It is recommended to run this
scan at several different times of day and night

2 Record relevant AP and SM configuration parameters within the current


operating network, if applicable, including:
 Authentication and authorization parameters
 Frequency configuration
 Data network configuration
 RF statistics
 Security configuration
3 Configure the PMP 450 AP and SMs for deployment
4 Install the PMP 450 AP (frequency A)

5 Install the PMP 450 MIMO (frequency A) SMs – powered on


6 Verify SM registration, link quality, and link performance.
7 Continue installation for frequency B sector and frequency C sector.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-11


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Site planning
This section describes factors to be taken into account when choosing sites for the AP or
SM, power supplies, CMM4 (if applicable) and GPS antenna (if applicable).

AP or SM site selection
When selecting a site for the AP or SM, consider the following factors:
 Height and location to ensure that people are kept away from the antenna; see
Calculated distances and power compliance margins on page 4-15.
 Height and location to achieve the best radio path.
 Ability to meet the requirements specified in Grounding and lightning protection on
page 2-62.
 Aesthetics and planning permission issues.
 Cable lengths; see Maximum cable lengths on page 2-12.
 The effect of strong winds on the installation; see Wind loading on page 2-13.

Power supply site selection


When selecting a site for the AP or SM power supply, consider the following factors:
 Indoor location with no possibility of condensation.
 Availability of a mains electricity supply.
 Accessibility for viewing status indicator LED and connecting Ethernet cables.
 Cable lengths; see Maximum cable lengths on page 2-12.

Maximum cable lengths


When installing PMP 450 Series APs or SMs, the maximum permitted length of the shielded
copper Ethernet interface cable is 330 feet (100m) from AP/SM to their associated power
supplies or CMM4.
For maximum synchronization cable lengths when receiving synchronization signalling from
a UGPS module, see Table 25.
Table 25 Sync cable length specification

Configuration Maximum Cable Maximum Cable


Length (feet) Length (meters)

UGPS powered via external power source 330 100

UGPS powered via PMP 450 AP (via AP 130 40


sync port)

2-12 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Wind loading
Ensure that the site is not prone to excessive wind loading.
Antennas and equipment mounted on towers or buildings will subject the mounting
structure to significant lateral forces when there is appreciable wind. Antennas are
normally specified by the amount of force (in pounds) for specific wind strengths. The
magnitude of the force depends on both the wind strength and size of the antenna.

Calculation of lateral force (metric)


The magnitude of the lateral force can be estimated from:
Force (in kilograms) = 0.1045aV2
Where: Is:
a surface area in square meters

V wind speed in meters per second


The lateral force produced by a single PMP 450 at different wind speeds is shown in Table
26 and Table 27.
Table 26 Lateral force - metric

Lateral force (Kg) at wind speed


(meters per second)
Largest surface area (square meters)

30 40 50 60 70

0.066 (AP – 5 GHz, 60 Degree Sector) 6 11 17 25 34

0.083 (AP – 5 GHz, 90 Degree Sector) 8 14 22 31 43

0.27 (AP – 2.4 GHz, 60 Degree Sector) 25 45 71 102 138

0.088 (AP – 3.5 GHz/3.6 GHz, 90 Degree


8 14 22 33 45
Sector)

0.0027 (SM) 0.25 0.45 0.7 1 1.4

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-13


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Calculation of lateral force (US)


The magnitude of the lateral force can be estimated from:
Force (in pounds) = 0.0042Av2
Where: Is:
A surface area in square feet
v wind speed in miles per hour
The lateral force produced by a single PMP 450 unit at different wind speeds is shown in
Table 27.
Table 27 Lateral force - US

Lateral force (lb) at wind speed


Largest surface area (square feet) (miles per hour)

80 100 120 140 150

0.71 (AP – 5 GHz, 60 Degree Sector) 19 30 43 58 67

0.89 (AP – 5 GHz, 90 Degree Sector) 24 37 54 73 84

2.9 (AP – 2.4 GHz, 60 Degree Sector) 78 122 175 239 274

0.94 (AP – 3.5 GHz/3.6 GHz, 90 Degree Sector) 25 40 57 77 89

0.29 (SM) 7.8 12 18 23 27

Capabilities of the PMP 450 Series


The structure and mounting brackets of the AP are capable of withstanding wind speeds up
to:
 190 kph (118 mph) – 5 GHz Sector Antennas
 216 kph (135 mph) – 2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz Sector Antennas
Ensure that the structure to which the AP is fixed to is also capable of withstanding the
prevalent wind speeds and loads.
The structure and mounting brackets of the SM are capable of withstanding wind speeds up
to 190 kph (118 mph). Ensure that the structure to which the SM is fixed to is also capable
of withstanding the prevalent wind speeds and loads.

Wind speed statistics


Contact the national meteorological office for the country concerned to identify the likely
wind speeds prevalent at the proposed location. Use this data to estimate the total wind
loading on the support structures. Sources of information:
 US National Weather Service, see http://www.nws.noaa.gov/.
 UK Meteorological Office, see www.meto.gov.uk.

2-14 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Link planning
This section describes factors to be taken into account when planning links, such as range,
obstacles, path loss and throughput.

Range and obstacles


Calculate the range of the link and identify any obstacles that may affect radio performance.
Perform a survey to identify all the obstructions (such as trees or buildings) in the path and
to assess the risk of interference. This information is necessary in order to achieve an
accurate link feasibility assessment.
The PMP 450 Series is designed to operate in Near-Line-of-Sight (nLOS), Non-Line-of-Sight
(NLOS) and Line-of-Sight (LOS) environments. A NLOS environment is one in which there
is no optical line-of-sight, that is, there are obstructions between the antennas. See Figure
1.
OFDM technology can often use multi-pathing to an advantage to overcome nLOS,
especially in cases where the Fresnel zone is only partially blocked by buildings, “urban
canyons”, or foliage. OFDM tends to help especially when obstacles are near the middle of
the link, and less so when the obstacles are very near the SM or AP.
However, attenuation through walls and trees is substantial for any use of the 2.4 GHz, 3.5
GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz frequency bands. Even with OFDM, these products are
not expected to penetrate walls or extensive trees and foliage.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-15


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 28 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B
with
7.0 mi / 5.0 mi / 2.3 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.4 mi /
Integrated
11.3 km 8.0 km 3.6 km 1.8 km 0.6 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 40.0 mi / 31.5 mi / 14.2 mi / 7.1 mi / 2.5 mi /
adds 17 dB to 64.0 km 50.4 km 22.8 km 11.4 km 4.0 km
5.8GHz Max. SM capability
LOS Link (SM 450d)
Budget (no fade
margin) with CLIP
that adds 8 19.9 mi / 14.1 mi / 6.4 mi / 3.2 mi / 1.1 mi /
dB to SM 31.8 km 22.5 km 10.2 km 5.1 km 1.8 km
capability
with Reflector
Dish that 40.0 mi / 31.5 mi / 14.2 mi / 7.1 mi / 2.5 mi /
adds 16 dB to 64.0 km 50.4 km 22.8 km 11.4 km 4.0 km
SM capability
with
4.0 mi / 2.8 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.2 mi /
Integrated
6.3 km 4.5 km 2.0 km 1.0 km 0.4 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
PMP 450 Dish that 25.0 mi / 17.7 mi / 8.0 mi / 4.0 mi / 1.4 mi /
5.8GHz Max. adds 17 dB to 40.0 km 28.3 km 12.8 km 6.4 km 2.2 km
nLOS Link SM capability
Budget (SM 450d)
(additional 5 dB with CLIP
link loss) that adds 8 11.2 mi / 7.9 mi / 3.6 mi / 1.8 mi / 0.6 mi /
dB to SM 17.9 km 12.7 km 5.7 km 2.9 km 1.0 km
capability
with Reflector
Dish that 25.0 mi / 17.7 mi / 8.0 mi / 4.0 mi / 1.4 mi /
adds 16 dB to 40.0 km 28.3 km 12.8 km 6.4 km 2.2 km
SM capability
with
1.3 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
2.0 km 1.4 km 0.6 km 0.3 km 0.1 km
SM antenna
with
5.8GHz Max. Integrated
NLOS1 Link Dish that 7.9 mi / 5.6 mi / 2.5 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.4 mi /
Budget adds 17 dB to 12.7 km 9.0 km 4.0 km 2.0 km 0.7 km
(additional 15 SM capability
dB link loss) (SM 450d)
with CLIP
that adds 8 3.5 mi / 2.5 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.2 mi /
dB to SM 5.7 km 4.0 km 1.8 km 0.9 km 0.3 km
capability

2-16 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
with Reflector
Dish that 7.9 mi / 5.6 mi / 2.5 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.4 mi /
adds 16 dB to 12.7 km 9.0 km 4.0 km 2.0 km 0.7 km
SM capability
with
0.4 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.0 mi /
Integrated
0.6 km 0.4 km 0.2 km 0.1 km 0.0 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 2.5 mi / 1.8 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.1 mi /
5.8GHz Max. adds 17 dB to 4.0 km 2.8 km 1.3 km 0.6 km 0.2 km
NLOS2 Link SM capability
Budget (SM 450d)
(additional 25 with CLIP
dB link loss) that adds 8 1.1 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /
dB to SM 1.8 km 1.3 km 0.6 km 0.3 km 0.1 km
capability
with Reflector
Dish that 2.5 mi / 1.8 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.1 mi /
adds 16 dB to 4.0 km 2.8 km 1.3 km 0.6 km 0.2 km
SM capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-17


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 29 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B
with
9.3 mi / 6.6 mi / 2.9 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.5 mi /
Integrated
14.9 km 10.5 km 4.7 km 2.3 km 0.9 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 18.5 mi / 9.2 mi / 3.4 mi /
adds 17 dB to 64.0 km 64.0 km 29.6 km 14.7 km 5.5 km
5.8GHz Max. SM capability
LOS Link (SM 450d)
Budget (no fade
margin) with CLIP
that adds 8 26.2 mi / 18.5 mi / 8.3 mi / 4.1 mi / 1.5 mi /
dB to SM 41.9 km 29.6 km 13.2 km 6.6 km 2.5 km
capability
with Reflector
Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 18.5 mi / 9.2 mi / 3.4 mi /
adds 16 dB to 64.0 km 64.0 km 29.6 km 14.7 km 5.5 km
SM capability
with
5.2 mi / 3.7 mi / 1.7 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.3 mi /
Integrated
8.4 km 5.9 km 2.6 km 1.3 km 0.5 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
PMP 450 Dish that 32.9 mi / 23.3 mi / 10.4 mi / 5.2 mi / 1.9 mi /
5.8GHz Max. adds 17 dB to 52.7 km 37.3 km 16.7 km 8.3 km 3.1 km
nLOS Link SM capability
Budget (SM 450d)
(additional 5 dB with CLIP
link loss) that adds 8 14.7 mi / 10.4 mi / 4.7 mi / 2.3 mi / 0.9 mi /
dB to SM 23.5 km 16.7 km 7.4 km 3.7 km 1.4 km
capability
with Reflector
Dish that 32.9 mi / 23.3 mi / 10.4 mi / 5.2 mi / 1.9 mi /
adds 16 dB to 52.7 km 37.3 km 16.7 km 8.3 km 3.1 km
SM capability
with
1.7 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
2.6 km 1.9 km 0.8 km 0.4 km 0.2 km
SM antenna
with
5.8GHz Max. Integrated
NLOS1 Link Dish that 10.4 mi / 7.4 mi / 3.3 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.6 mi /
Budget adds 17 dB to 16.7 km 11.8 km 5.3 km 2.6 km 1.0 km
(additional 15 SM capability
dB link loss) (SM 450d)
with CLIP
that adds 8 4.7 mi / 3.3 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.7 mi / 0.3 mi /
dB to SM 7.4 km 5.3 km 2.4 km 1.2 km 0.4 km
capability

2-18 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
5.8GHz Max.
with Reflector
NLOS1 Link
Dish that 10.4 mi / 7.4 mi / 3.3 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.6 mi /
Budget
adds 16 dB to 16.7 km 11.8 km 5.3 km 2.6 km 1.0 km
(additional 15
SM capability
dB link loss)
with
0.5 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.0 mi /
Integrated
0.8 km 0.6 km 0.3 km 0.1 km 0.0 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 3.3 mi / 2.3 mi / 1.0 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi /
5.8GHz Max. adds 17 dB to 5.3 km 3.7 km 1.7 km 0.8 km 0.3 km
NLOS2 Link SM capability
Budget (SM 450d)
(additional 25 with CLIP
dB link loss) that adds 8 1.5 mi / 1.0 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /
dB to SM 2.4 km 1.7 km 0.7 km 0.4 km 0.1 km
capability
with Reflector
Dish that 3.3 mi / 2.3 mi / 1.0 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi /
adds 16 dB to 5.3 km 3.7 km 1.7 km 0.8 km 0.3 km
SM capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-19


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 30 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x

QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-


Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B
with
13.4 mi / 9.5 mi / 4.3 mi / 2.2 mi / 0.7 mi /
Integrated
21.5 km 15.2 km 6.9 km 3.4 km 1.1 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 27.4 mi / 13.6 mi / 4.3 mi /
adds 17 dB to 64.0 km 64.0 km 43.8 km 21.7 km 6.9 km
5.8GHz Max. SM capability
LOS Link (SM 450d)
Budget (no fade
margin) with CLIP
that adds 8 37.8 mi / 26.8 mi / 12.2 mi / 6.1 mi / 1.9 mi /
dB to SM 60.5 km 42.8 km 19.6 km 9.7 km 3.1 km
capability
with Reflector
Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 27.4 mi / 13.6 mi / 4.3 mi /
adds 16 dB to 64.0 km 64.0 km 43.8 km 21.7 km 6.9 km
SM capability
with
7.5 mi / 5.3 mi / 2.4 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.4 mi /
Integrated
12.1 km 8.5 km 3.9 km 1.9 km 0.6 km
SM antenna
with
PMP Integrated
450 Dish that 40.0 mi / 33.7 mi / 15.4 mi / 7.6 mi / 2.4 mi /
5.8GHz Max. adds 17 dB to 64.0 km 53.9 km 24.6 km 12.2 km 3.9 km
nLOS Link SM capability
Budget (SM 450d)
(additional 5 dB with CLIP
link loss) that adds 8 21.3 mi / 15.0 mi / 6.9 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.1 mi /
dB to SM 34.0 km 24.1 km 11.0 km 5.5 km 1.7 km
capability
with Reflector
Dish that 40.0 mi / 33.7 mi / 15.4 mi / 7.6 mi / 2.4 mi /
adds 16 dB to 64.0 km 53.9 km 24.6 km 12.2 km 3.9 km
SM capability
with
2.4 mi / 1.7 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
3.8 km 2.7 km 1.2 km 0.6 km 0.2 km
SM antenna
with
5.8GHz Max. Integrated
NLOS1 Link Dish that 15.0 mi / 10.7 mi / 4.9 mi / 2.4 mi / 0.8 mi /
Budget adds 17 dB to 24.1 km 17.0 km 7.8 km 3.9 km 1.2 km
(additional 15 SM capability
dB link loss) (SM 450d)
with CLIP
that adds 8 6.7 mi / 4.8 mi / 2.2 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.3 mi /
dB to SM 10.8 km 7.6 km 3.5 km 1.7 km 0.5 km
capability

2-20 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
5.8GHz Max.
with Reflector
NLOS1 Link
Dish that 15.0 mi / 10.7 mi / 4.9 mi / 2.4 mi / 0.8 mi /
Budget
adds 16 dB to 24.1 km 17.0 km 7.8 km 3.9 km 1.2 km
(additional 15
SM capability
dB link loss)
with
0.8 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.0 mi /
Integrated
1.2 km 0.9 km 0.4 km 0.2 km 0.1 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 4.8 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.2 mi /
5.8GHz Max. adds 17 dB to 7.6 km 5.4 km 2.5 km 1.2 km 0.4 km
NLOS2 Link SM capability
Budget (SM 450d)
(additional 25 with CLIP
dB link loss) that adds 8 2.1 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.7 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
dB to SM 3.4 km 2.4 km 1.1 km 0.5 km 0.2 km
capability
with Reflector
Dish that 4.8 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.2 mi /
adds 16 dB to 7.6 km 5.4 km 2.5 km 1.2 km 0.4 km
SM capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-21


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 31 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x

Modulation QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-


MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B
with 6.6 mi / 4.7 mi / 2.4 mi / 1.0 mi / 0.4 mi /
Integrated 10.6 km 7.5 km 3.9 km 1.6 km 0.6 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 40.0 mi / 29.5 mi / 15.2 mi / 6.5 mi / 2.3 mi /
adds 17 dB to 64.0 km 47.2 km 24.3 km 10.4 km 3.7 km
5.4Gz Max. SM capability
LOS Link (SM 450d)
Budget (no
with CLIP
fade margin)H 16.6 mi / 11.7 mi / 6.1 mi / 2.6 mi / 0.9 mi /
that adds 8
dB to SM 26.5 km 18.8 km 9.7 km 4.1 km 1.5 km
capability
with
Reflector 40.0 mi / 29.5 mi / 15.2 mi / 6.5 mi / 2.3 mi /
Dish that 64.0 km 47.2 km 24.3 km 10.4 km 3.7 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability
with 3.7 mi / 2.6 mi / 1.4 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.2 mi /
Integrated
5.9 km 4.2 km 2.2 km 0.9 km 0.3 km
PMP SM antenna
45016 with
Integrated
Dish that 23.4 mi / 16.6 mi / 8.6 mi / 3.7 mi / 1.3 mi /
adds 17 dB to 37.5 km 26.5 km 13.7 km 5.9 km 2.1 km
5.4GHz Max. SM capability
nLOS Link (SM 450d)
Budget
(additional 5 with CLIP
dB link loss) that adds 8 9.3 mi / 6.6 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.5 mi /
dB to SM 14.9 km 10.6 km 5.4 km 2.3 km 0.8 km
capability
with
Reflector 23.4 mi / 16.6 mi / 8.6 mi / 3.7 mi / 1.3 mi /
Dish that 37.5 km 26.5 km 13.7 km 5.9 km 2.1 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability
with 1.2 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated 1.9 km 1.3 km 0.7 km 0.3 km 0.1 km
5.4GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link
with
Budget
Integrated
(additional 15 7.4 mi / 5.2 mi / 2.7 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.4 mi /
Dish that
dB link loss) 11.9 km 8.4 km 4.3 km 1.9 km 0.7 km
adds 17 dB to
SM capability
(SM 450d)

16
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.

2-22 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
with CLIP
that adds 8 2.9 mi / 2.1 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi /
5.4GHz Max. dB to SM 4.7 km 3.3 km 1.7 km 0.7 km 0.3 km
NLOS1 Link capability
Budget with
(additional 15 Reflector
dB link loss) 7.4 mi / 5.2 mi / 2.7 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.4 mi /
Dish that
11.9 km 8.4 km 4.3 km 1.9 km 0.7 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability
with
0.4 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.0 mi /
Integrated
0.6 km 0.4 km 0.2 km 0.1 km 0.0 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 2.3 mi / 1.7 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.1 mi /
adds 17 dB to 3.7 km 2.7 km 1.4 km 0.6 km 0.2 km
5.4GHz Max. SM capability
NLOS1 Link (SM 450d)
Budget
(additional 25 with CLIP
dB link loss) that adds 8 0.9 mi / 0.7 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.1 mi /
dB to SM 1.5 km 1.1 km 0.5 km 0.2 km 0.1 km
capability
with
Reflector
2.3 mi / 1.7 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.1 mi /
Dish that
3.7 km 2.7 km 1.4 km 0.6 km 0.2 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-23


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 32 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x

Modulation QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-


MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B
with 9.7 mi / 6.8 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.6 mi /
Integrated 15.4 km 10.9 km 5.4 km 2.6 km 1.0 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 21.4 mi / 10.3 mi / 3.8 mi /
adds 17 dB to 64.0 km 64.0 km 34.2 km 16.5 km 6.1 km
5.4Gz Max. SM capability
LOS Link (SM 450d)
Budget (no
with CLIP
fade margin)H 24.2 mi / 17.2 mi / 8.5 mi / 4.1 mi / 1.5 mi /
that adds 8
dB to SM 38.8 km 27.5 km 13.6 km 6.6 km 2.4 km
capability
with
Reflector 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 21.4 mi / 10.3 mi / 3.8 mi /
Dish that 64.0 km 64.0 km 34.2 km 16.5 km 6.1 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability
with 5.4 mi / 3.8 mi / 1.9 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.3 mi /
Integrated 8.7 km 6.1 km 3.0 km 1.5 km 0.5 km
PMP SM antenna
45017 with
Integrated
Dish that 34.2 mi / 24.2 mi / 12.0 mi / 5.8 mi / 2.1 mi /
adds 17 dB to 54.8 km 38.8 km 19.2 km 9.3 km 3.4 km
5.4GHz Max. SM capability
nLOS Link (SM 450d)
Budget
(additional 5 with CLIP
dB link loss) that adds 8 13.6 mi / 9.7 mi / 4.8 mi / 2.3 mi / 0.9 mi /
dB to SM 21.8 km 15.4 km 7.7 km 3.7 km 1.4 km
capability
with
Reflector 34.2 mi / 24.2 mi / 12.0 mi / 5.8 mi / 2.1 mi /
Dish that 54.8 km 38.8 km 19.2 km 9.3 km 3.4 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability
with 1.7 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated 2.7 km 1.9 km 1.0 km 0.5 km 0.2 km
5.4GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link
with
Budget
Integrated
(additional 15 7.4 mi / 5.2 mi / 2.7 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.4 mi /
Dish that
dB link loss) 11.9 km 8.4 km 4.3 km 1.9 km 0.7 km
adds 17 dB to
SM capability
(SM 450d)

17
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.

2-24 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
with CLIP
that adds 8 4.3 mi / 3.1 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.7 mi / 0.3 mi /
5.4GHz Max. dB to SM 6.9 km 4.9 km 2.4 km 1.2 km 0.4 km
NLOS1 Link capability
Budget with
(additional 15 Reflector
dB link loss) 10.8 mi / 7.7 mi / 3.8 mi / 1.8 mi / 0.7 mi /
Dish that
17.3 km 12.3 km 6.1 km 2.9 km 1.1 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability
with
0.8 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.0 mi /
Integrated
1.3 km 0.9 km 0.4 km 0.2 km 0.1 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that
adds 17 dB to 3.4 mi / 2.4 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.2 mi /
SM capability 5.5 km 3.9 km 1.9 km 0.9 km 0.3 km
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link (SM 450d)
Budget
(additional 25 with CLIP
dB link loss) that adds 8 2.0 mi / 1.4 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
dB to SM 3.2 km 2.2 km 1.0 km 0.5 km 0.2 km
capability
with
Reflector
4.9 mi / 3.5 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.3 mi /
Dish that
7.9 km 5.6 km 2.5 km 1.3 km 0.5 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-25


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 33 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth
Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x

Modulation QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-


MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B
with 13.9 mi / 9.9 mi / 4.5 mi / 2.2 mi / 0.8 mi /
Integrated 22.3 km 15.8 km 7.1 km 3.6 km 1.3 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 28.1 mi / 14.1 mi / 5.0 mi /
adds 17 dB to 64.0 km 64.0 km 45.0 km 22.6 km 8.0 km
5.4Gz Max. SM capability
LOS Link (SM 450d)
Budget (no
with CLIP
fade margin)H 35.0 mi / 24.8 mi / 11.2 mi / 5.6 mi / 2.0 mi /
that adds 8
dB to SM 56.0 km 39.7 km 17.9 km 9.0 km 3.2 km
capability
with
Reflector 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 28.1 mi / 14.1 mi / 5.0 mi /
Dish that 64.0 km 64.0 km 45.0 km 22.6 km 8.0 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability
with 7.8 mi / 5.5 mi / 2.5 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.4 mi /
Integrated 12.5 km 8.9 km 4.0 km 2.0 km 0.7 km
PMP SM antenna
45018 with
Integrated
Dish that 40.0 mi / 35.0 mi / 15.8 mi / 7.9 mi / 2.8 mi /
adds 17 dB to 64.0 km 56.0 km 25.3 km 12.7 km 4.5 km
5.4GHz Max. SM capability
nLOS Link (SM 450d)
Budget
(additional 5 with CLIP
dB link loss) that adds 8 19.7 mi / 13.9 mi / 6.3 mi / 3.2 mi / 1.1 mi /
dB to SM 31.5 km 22.3 km 10.1 km 5.1 km 1.8 km
capability
with
Reflector 40.0 mi / 35.0 mi / 15.8 mi / 7.9 mi / 2.8 mi /
Dish that 64.0 km 56.0 km 25.3 km 12.7 km 4.5 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability
with 2.5 mi / 1.8 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated 4.0 km 2.8 km 1.3 km 0.6 km 0.2 km
5.4GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link
with
Budget
Integrated
(additional 15 15.6 mi / 11.1 mi / 5.0 mi / 2.5 mi / 0.9 mi /
Dish that
dB link loss) 25.0 km 17.7 km 8.0 km 4.0 km 1.4 km
adds 17 dB to
SM capability
(SM 450d)

18
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.

2-26 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
with CLIP
that adds 8 6.2 mi / 4.4 mi / 2.0 mi / 1.0 mi / 0.4 mi /
5.4GHz Max. dB to SM 10.0 km 7.1 km 3.2 km 1.6 km 0.6 km
NLOS1 Link capability
Budget with
(additional 15 Reflector
dB link loss) 15.6 mi / 11.1 mi / 5.0 mi / 2.5 mi / 0.9 mi /
Dish that
25.0 km 17.7 km 8.0 km 4.0 km 1.4 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability
with
0.8 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.0 mi /
Integrated
1.3 km 0.9 km 0.4 km 0.2 km 0.1 km
SM antenna
with
Integrated
Dish that 4.9 mi / 3.5 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.3 mi /
adds 17 dB to 7.9 km 5.6 km 2.5 km 1.3 km 0.5 km
5.4GHz Max. SM capability
NLOS1 Link (SM 450d)
Budget
(additional 25 with CLIP
dB link loss) that adds 8 2.0 mi / 1.4 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
dB to SM 3.2 km 2.2 km 1.0 km 0.5 km 0.2 km
capability
with
Reflector
4.9 mi / 3.5 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.3 mi /
Dish that
7.9 km 5.6 km 2.5 km 1.3 km 0.5 km
adds 16 dB to
SM capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-27


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 34 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with
22.1 mi / 15.7 mi / 7.6 mi / 3.6 mi / 1.7 mi /
Integrated
35.4 km 25.1 km 12.1 km 5.7 km 2.8 km
SM antenna
2.4GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 30.2 mi / 14.3 mi / 6.8 mi /
adds 12 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 48.4 km 22.9 km 11.0 km
to SM
capability
with
12.5 mi / 8.8 mi / 4.3 mi / 2.0 mi / 1.0 mi /
Integrated
19.9 km 14.1 km 6.8 km 3.2 km 1.5 km
2.4GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 40.0 mi / 35.1 mi / 17.0 mi / 8.0 mi / 3.8 mi /
dB link loss) adds 12 dB 64.0 km 56.2 km 27.2 km 12.9 km 6.2 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
3.9 mi / 2.8 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi /
Integrated
6.3 km 4.5 km 2.2 km 1.0 km 0.5 km
2.4GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 15.7 mi / 11.1 mi / 5.4 mi / 2.5 mi / 1.2 mi /
dB link loss) adds 12 dB 25.1 km 17.8 km 8.6 km 4.1 km 1.9 km
to SM
capability
with
1.2 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
2.0 km 1.4 km 0.7 km 0.3 km 0.2 km
2.4GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 5.0 mi / 3.5 mi / 1.7 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi /
dB link loss) adds 12 dB 7.9 km 5.6 km 2.7 km 1.3 km 0.6 km
to SM
capability

2-28 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 35 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with
30.8 mi / 21.8 mi / 9.7 mi / 4.9 mi / 2.4 mi /
Integrated
49.3 km 34.9 km 15.6 km 7.8 km 3.9 km
SM antenna
2.4GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 38.8 mi / 19.4 mi / 9.7 mi /
adds 12 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 62.0 km 31.1 km 15.6 km
to SM
capability
with
17.3 mi / 12.3 mi / 5.5 mi / 2.7 mi / 1.4 mi /
Integrated
27.7 km 19.6 km 8.8 km 4.4 km 2.2 km
2.4GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 21.8 mi / 10.9 mi / 5.5 mi /
dB link loss) adds 12 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 34.9 km 17.5 km 8.8 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
5.5 mi / 3.9 mi / 1.7 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.4 mi /
Integrated
8.8 km 6.2 km 2.8 km 1.4 km 0.7 km
2.4GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 21.8 mi / 15.4 mi / 6.9 mi / 3.5 mi / 1.7 mi /
dB link loss) adds 12 dB 34.9 km 24.7 km 11.0 km 5.5 km 2.8 km
to SM
capability
with
1.7 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
2.8 km 2.0 km 0.9 km 0.4 km 0.2 km
2.4GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 6.9 mi / 4.9 mi / 2.2 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.5 mi /
dB link loss) adds 12 dB 11.0 km 7.8 km 3.5 km 1.7 km 0.9 km
to SM
capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-29


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 36 Link budget details – 2.4 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with
40.0 mi / 31.5 mi / 15.2 mi / 6.8 mi / 2.8 mi /
Integrated
64.0 km 50.3 km 24.4 km 10.9 km 4.5 km
SM antenna
2.4GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 27.1 mi / 11.3 mi /
adds 12 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 64.0 km 43.3 km 18.1 km
to SM
capability
with
25.0 mi / 17.7 mi / 8.6 mi / 3.8 mi / 1.6 mi /
Integrated
40.0 km 28.3 km 13.7 km 6.1 km 2.6 km
2.4GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 34.1 mi / 15.2 mi / 6.3 mi /
dB link loss) adds 12 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 54.6 km 24.4 km 10.2 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
7.9 mi / 5.6 mi / 2.7 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.5 mi /
Integrated
12.6 km 8.9 km 4.3 km 1.9 km 0.8 km
2.4GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 31.5 mi / 22.3 mi / 10.8 mi / 4.8 mi / 2.0 mi /
dB link loss) adds 12 dB 50.3 km 35.6 km 17.3 km 7.7 km 3.2 km
to SM
capability
with
2.5 mi / 1.8 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi /
Integrated
4.0 km 2.8 km 1.4 km 0.6 km 0.3 km
2.4GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 9.9 mi / 7.0 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.6 mi /
dB link loss) adds 12 dB 15.9 km 11.3 km 5.5 km 2.4 km 1.0 km
to SM
capability

2-30 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 37 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B
with
18.7 mi / 13.2 mi / 6.5 mi / 2.9 mi / 1.0 mi /
Integrated
29.9 km 21.1 km 10.5 km 4.7 km 1.6 km
SM antenna
3.5GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 23.2 mi / 10.4 mi / 3.6 mi /
adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 37.2 km 16.6 km 5.8 km
to SM
capability
with
10.5 mi / 7.4 mi / 3.7 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.6 mi /
Integrated
16.8 km 11.9 km 5.9 km 2.6 km 0.9 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 37.3 mi / 26.4 mi / 13.1 mi / 5.8 mi / 2.0 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 59.6 km 42.2 km 20.9 km 9.3 km 3.3 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
3.3 mi / 2.4 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi /
Integrated
5.3 km 3.8 km 1.9 km 0.8 km 0.3 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 11.8 mi / 8.3 mi / 4.1 mi / 1.8 mi / 0.6 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 18.8 km 13.3 km 6.6 km 3.0 km 1.0 km
to SM
capability
with
1.0 mi / 0.7 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
1.7 km 1.2 km 0.6 km 0.3 km 0.1 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 3.7 mi / 2.6 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.2 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 6.0 km 4.2 km 2.1 km 0.9 km 0.3 km
to SM
capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-31


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 38 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B
with
28.1 mi / 19.9 mi / 8.9 mi / 4.8 mi / 1.5 mi /
Integrated
44.9 km 31.8 km 14.2 km 7.7 km 2.4 km
SM antenna
3.5GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 31.6 mi / 17.0 mi / 5.3 mi /
adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 50.5 km 27.2 km 8.4 km
to SM
capability
with
15.8 mi / 11.2 mi / 5.0 mi / 2.7 mi / 0.8 mi /
Integrated
25.3 km 17.9 km 8.0 km 4.3 km 1.3 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 40.0 mi / 39.7 mi / 17.8 mi / 9.6 mi / 3.0 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 64.0 km 63.5 km 28.4 km 15.3 km 4.7 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
5.0 mi / 3.5 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.3 mi /
Integrated
8.0 km 5.7 km 2.5 km 1.4 km 0.4 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 17.7 mi / 12.5 mi / 5.6 mi / 3.0 mi / 0.9 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 28.4 km 20.1 km 9.0 km 4.8 km 1.5 km
to SM
capability
with
1.6 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
2.5 km 1.8 km 0.8 km 0.4 km 0.1 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 5.6 mi / 4.0 mi / 1.8 mi / 1.0 mi / 0.3 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 9.0 km 6.3 km 2.8 km 1.5 km 0.5 km
to SM
capability

2-32 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 39 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 7 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation
MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B
with
33.1 mi / 23.5 mi / 10.5 mi / 5.2 mi / 2.0 mi /
Integrated
53.0 km 37.5 km 16.8 km 8.3 km 3.2 km
SM antenna
3.5GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 37.2 mi / 18.4 mi / 7.2 mi /
adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 59.5 km 29.5 km 11.5 km
to SM
capability
with
18.6 mi / 13.2 mi / 5.9 mi / 2.9 mi / 1.1 mi /
Integrated
29.8 km 21.1 km 9.4 km 4.7 km 1.8 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 20.9 mi / 10.4 mi / 4.0 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 33.5 km 16.6 km 6.4 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
5.9 mi / 4.2 mi / 1.9 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.4 mi /
Integrated
9.4 km 6.7 km 3.0 km 1.5 km 0.6 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 20.9 mi / 14.8 mi / 6.6 mi / 3.3 mi / 1.3 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 33.5 km 23.7 km 10.6 km 5.2 km 2.0 km
to SM
capability
with
1.9 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
3.0 km 2.1 km 0.9 km 0.5 km 0.2 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 6.6 mi / 4.7 mi / 2.1 mi / 1.0 mi / 0.4 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 10.6 km 7.5 km 3.3 km 1.7 km 0.6 km
to SM
capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-33


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 40 Link budget details – 3.5 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with
40.0 mi / 29.2 mi / 14.6 mi / 6.5 mi / 2.1 mi /
Integrated
64.0 km 46.7 km 23.4 km 10.5 km 3.3 km
SM antenna
3.5GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 23.2 mi / 7.4 mi /
adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 64.0 km 37.1 km 11.9 km
to SM
capability
with
23.2 mi / 16.4 mi / 8.2 mi / 3.7 mi / 1.2 mi /
Integrated
37.1 km 26.3 km 13.2 km 5.9 km 1.9 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 29.2 mi / 13.0 mi / 4.2 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 46.7 km 20.9 km 6.7 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
7.3 mi / 5.2 mi / 2.6 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.4 mi /
Integrated
11.7 km 8.3 km 4.2 km 1.9 km 0.6 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 26.0 mi / 18.4 mi / 9.2 mi / 4.1 mi / 1.3 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 41.6 km 29.5 km 14.8 km 6.6 km 2.1 km
to SM
capability
with
2.3 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
3.7 km 2.6 km 1.3 km 0.6 km 0.2 km
3.5GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 8.2 mi / 5.8 mi / 2.9 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.4 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 13.2 km 9.3 km 4.7 km 2.1 km 0.7 km
to SM
capability

2-34 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 41 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 20 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with
20.3 mi / 14.4 mi / 5.7 mi / 2.6 mi / 0.8 mi /
Integrated
32.5 km 23.0 km 9.2 km 4.1 km 1.3 km
SM antenna
3.6GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 20.3 mi / 9.1 mi / 2.9 mi /
adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 32.5 km 14.5 km 4.6 km
to SM
capability
with
11.4 mi / 8.1 mi / 3.2 mi / 1.4 mi / 0.5 mi /
Integrated
18.3 km 12.9 km 5.1 km 2.3 km 0.7 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 40.0 mi / 28.7 mi / 11.4 mi / 5.1 mi / 1.6 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 64.0 km 45.9 km 18.3 km 8.2 km 2.6 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
3.6 mi / 2.6 mi / 1.0 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
5.8 km 4.1 km 1.6 km 0.7 km 0.2 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 12.8 mi / 9.1 mi / 3.6 mi / 1.6 mi / 0.5 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 20.5 km 14.5 km 5.8 km 2.6 km 0.8 km
to SM
capability
with
1.1 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.0 mi /
Integrated
1.8 km 1.3 km 0.5 km 0.2 km 0.1 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 4.1 mi / 2.9 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 6.5 km 4.6 km 1.8 km 0.8 km 0.3 km
to SM
capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-35


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 42 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 10 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with
21.2 mi / 15.0 mi / 7.0 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.1 mi /
Integrated
34.0 km 24.1 km 11.3 km 5.4 km 1.8 km
SM antenna
3.6GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 24.9 mi / 12.0 mi / 4.0 mi /
adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 39.9 km 19.1 km 6.5 km
to SM
capability
with
11.9 mi / 8.5 mi / 4.0 mi / 1.9 mi / 0.6 mi /
Integrated
19.1 km 13.5 km 6.3 km 3.0 km 1.0 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 40.0 mi / 30.0 mi / 14.0 mi / 6.7 mi / 2.3 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 64.0 km 48.0 km 22.4 km 10.8 km 3.6 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
3.8 mi / 2.7 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.2 mi /
Integrated
6.0 km 4.3 km 2.0 km 1.0 km 0.3 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 13.4 mi / 9.5 mi / 4.4 mi / 2.1 mi / 0.7 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 21.4 km 15.2 km 7.1 km 3.4 km 1.2 km
to SM
capability
with
1.2 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
1.9 km 1.4 km 0.6 km 0.3 km 0.1 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 4.2 mi / 3.0 mi / 1.4 mi / 0.7 mi / 0.2 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 6.8 km 4.8 km 2.2 km 1.1 km 0.4 km
to SM
capability

2-36 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 43 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 7 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B
with
27.0 mi / 19.1 mi / 8.5 mi / 3.8 mi / 1.2 mi /
Integrated
43.3 km 30.6 km 13.7 km 6.1 km 2.0 km
SM antenna
3.6GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 30.3 mi / 13.5 mi / 4.4 mi /
adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 48.5 km 21.7 km 7.1 km
to SM
capability
with
15.2 mi / 10.8 mi / 4.8 mi / 2.1 mi / 0.7 mi /
Integrated
24.3 km 17.2 km 7.7 km 3.4 km 1.1 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 40.0 mi / 38.2 mi / 17.1 mi / 7.6 mi / 2.5 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 64.0 km 61.1 km 27.3 km 12.2 km 4.0 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
4.8 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.7 mi / 0.2 mi /
Integrated
7.7 km 5.4 km 2.4 km 1.1 km 0.4 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 17.1 mi / 12.1 mi / 5.4 mi / 2.4 mi / 0.8 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 27.3 km 19.3 km 8.6 km 3.9 km 1.3 km
to SM
capability
with
1.5 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
2.4 km 1.7 km 0.8 km 0.3 km 0.1 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 5.4 mi / 3.8 mi / 1.7 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.2 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 8.6 km 6.1 km 2.7 km 1.2 km 0.4 km
to SM
capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-37


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 44 Link budget details – 3.6 GHz PMP 450 link, 5 MHz Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 4x 6x 8x
QPSK- QPSK- 16QAM- 64QAM- 256QAM-
Modulation MIMO-A MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B MIMO-B

with
32.1 mi / 22.7 mi / 10.2 mi / 4.5 mi / 1.4 mi /
Integrated
51.4 km 36.4 km 16.3 km 7.3 km 2.2 km
SM antenna
3.6GHz Max.
LOS Link with
Budget (no Reflector
fade margin) Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 36.0 mi / 16.1 mi / 4.8 mi /
adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 57.7 km 25.8 km 7.7 km
to SM
capability
with
18.1 mi / 12.8 mi / 5.7 mi / 2.6 mi / 0.8 mi /
Integrated
28.9 km 20.5 km 9.1 km 4.1 km 1.2 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
nLOS Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 5 Dish that 40.0 mi / 40.0 mi / 20.3 mi / 9.1 mi / 2.7 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 64.0 km 64.0 km 32.4 km 14.5 km 4.3 km
PMP to SM
450 capability
with
5.7 mi / 4.0 mi / 1.8 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.2 mi /
Integrated
9.1 km 6.5 km 2.9 km 1.3 km 0.4 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS1 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 15 Dish that 20.3 mi / 14.3 mi / 6.4 mi / 2.9 mi / 0.9 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 32.4 km 23.0 km 10.3 km 4.6 km 1.4 km
to SM
capability
with
1.8 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
Integrated
2.9 km 2.0 km 0.9 km 0.4 km 0.1 km
3.6GHz Max. SM antenna
NLOS2 Link with
Budget Reflector
(additional 25 Dish that 6.4 mi / 4.5 mi / 2.0 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.3 mi /
dB link loss) adds 11 dB 10.3 km 7.3 km 3.2 km 1.4 km 0.4 km
to SM
capability

2-38 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 45 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz Channel
Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 3x
Modulation QPSK-SISO 16-QAM-SISO 64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated SM 7.0 mi / 2.3 mi / 1.1 mi /
antenna 11.3 km 3.6 km 1.8 km
5.8GHz
Max. LOS with CLIP that adds
19.9 mi / 6.4 mi / 3.2 mi /
Link 9 dB to SM 31.8 km 10.2 km 5.1 km
Budget capability
(no fade
margin) with Reflector Dish
40.0 mi / 16.0 mi / 8.0 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
64.0 km 25.5 km 12.8 km
SM capability
with Integrated SM 4.0 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.6 mi /
5.8GHz antenna 6.3 km 2.0 km 1.0 km
Max.
with CLIP that adds
nLOS Link 11.2 mi / 3.6 mi / 5.7 1.8 mi / 2.9
9 dB to SM
Budget 17.9 km km km
capability
(additional
5 dB link with Reflector Dish
PMP 450 loss) 28.1 mi / 9.0 mi / 4.5 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
AP 44.9 km 14.4 km 7.2 km
SM capability
PMP 430
SM with Integrated SM 1.3 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi /
5.8GHz antenna 2.0 km 0.6 km 0.3 km
Max.
NLOS1 with CLIP that adds
3.5 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.6 mi /
Link 9 dB to SM
5.7 km 1.8 km 0.9 km
Budget capability
(additional
15 dB link with Reflector Dish
8.9 mi / 2.8 mi / 1.4 mi /
loss) that adds 17 dB to
14.2 km 4.5 km 2.3 km
SM capability
with Integrated SM 0.4 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.1 mi /
5.8GHz antenna 0.6 km 0.2 km 0.1 km
Max.
NLOS2 with CLIP that adds
1.1 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi /
Link 9 dB to SM
1.8 km 0.6 km 0.3 km
Budget capability
(additional
25 dB link with Reflector Dish
2.8 mi / 0.9 mi / 0.4 mi /
loss) that adds 17 dB to
4.5 km 1.4 km 0.7 km
SM capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-39


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 46 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel
Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 3x
16-QAM-
Modulation QPSK-SISO 64-QAM-SISO
SISO
with Integrated 9.3 mi / 2.9 mi / 1.5 mi /
SM antenna 14.9 km 4.7 km 2.3 km
5.8GHz with CLIP that
26.2 mi / 8.3 mi / 4.1 mi /
Max. LOS adds 9 dB to SM
41.9 km 13.2 km 6.6 km
Link Budget capability
(no fade
margin) with Reflector
Dish that adds 17 40.0 mi / 20.8 mi / 10.3 mi /
dB to SM 64.0 km 33.2 km 16.5 km
capability
with Integrated 5.2 mi / 1.7 mi / 0.8 mi /
SM antenna 8.4 km 2.6 km 1.3 km
5.8GHz
with CLIP that
Max. nLOS 14.7 mi / 4.7 mi / 2.3 mi /
adds 9 dB to SM
Link Budget 23.5 km 7.4 km 3.7 km
capability
(additional
5 dB link with Reflector
PMP 450 loss) Dish that adds 17 37.0 mi / 11.7 mi / 5.8 mi /
AP dB to SM 59.1 km 18.7 km 9.3 km
PMP 430 capability
SM
with Integrated 1.7 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.3 mi /
SM antenna 2.6 km 0.8 km 0.4 km
5.8GHz
Max. with CLIP that
4.7 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.7 mi /
NLOS1 Link adds 9 dB to SM
7.4 km 2.4 km 1.2 km
Budget capability
(additional
15 dB link with Reflector
loss) Dish that adds 17 11.7 mi / 3.7 mi / 1.8 mi /
dB to SM 18.7 km 5.9 km 2.9 km
capability
with Integrated 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /
SM antenna 0.8 km 0.3 km 0.1 km
5.8GHz
Max. with CLIP that
1.5 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi /
NLOS2 Link adds 9 dB to SM
2.4 km 0.7 km 0.4 km
Budget capability
(additional
25 dB link with Reflector
loss) Dish that adds 17 3.7 mi / 1.2 mi / 0.6 mi /
dB to SM 5.9 km 1.9 km 0.9 km
capability

2-40 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 47 Link budget details – 5.8 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel
Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 3x
Modulation QPSK-SISO 16-QAM-SISO 64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated 13.4 mi / 4.3 mi / 2.2 mi /
SM antenna 21.5 km 6.9 km 3.4 km
5.8GHz
with CLIP that
Max. LOS 37.8 mi / 12.2 mi / 6.1 mi /
adds 9 dB to SM
Link Budget 60.5 km 19.6 km 9.7 km
capability
(no fade
margin) with Reflector Dish
40.0 mi / 30.7 mi / 15.2 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
64.0 km 49.2 km 24.4 km
SM capability
with Integrated 7.5 mi / 2.4 mi / 1.2 mi /
SM antenna 12.1 km 3.9 km 1.9 km
5.8GHz
Max. nLOS with CLIP that
21.3 mi / 6.9 mi / 3.4 mi /
Link Budget adds 9 dB to SM
34.0 km 11.0 km 5.5 km
(additional capability
5 dB link
loss) with Reflector Dish
PMP 450 40.0 mi / 17.3 mi / 8.6 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
AP 64.0 km 27.6 km 13.7 km
SM capability
PMP 430
SM with Integrated 2.4 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi /
5.8GHz SM antenna 3.8 km 1.2 km 0.6 km
Max.
with CLIP that
NLOS1 Link 6.7 mi / 2.2 mi / 1.1 mi /
adds 9 dB to SM
Budget 10.8 km 3.5 km 1.7 km
capability
(additional
15 dB link with Reflector Dish
loss) 16.9 mi / 5.5 mi / 2.7 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
27.0 km 8.7 km 4.3 km
SM capability
with Integrated 0.8 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /
5.8GHz SM antenna 1.2 km 0.4 km 0.2 km
Max.
with CLIP that
NLOS2 Link 2.1 mi / 0.7 mi / 0.3 mi /
adds 9 dB to SM
Budget 3.4 km 1.1 km 0.5 km
capability
(additional
25 dB link with Reflector Dish
loss) 5.3 mi / 1.7 mi / 0.9 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
8.5 km 2.8 km 1.4 km
SM capability

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-41


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 48 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 20MHz
Channel Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 3x
Modulation QPSK-SISO 16-QAM-SISO 64-QAM-SISO
with Integrated SM 6.6 mi / 2.4 mi / 1.0 mi /
antenna 10.6 km 3.9 km 1.6 km
5.4GHz
Max. LOS with CLIP that adds
16.6 mi / 6.1 mi / 2.6 mi /
Link 8 dB to SM
26.5 km 9.7 km 4.1 km
Budget (no capability
fade
margin) with Reflector Dish
40.0 mi / 17.1 mi / 7.3 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
64.0 km 27.3 km 11.7 km
SM capability
with Integrated SM 3.7 mi / 1.4 mi / 0.6 mi /
5.4GHz antenna 5.9 km 2.2 km 0.9 km
Max. nLOS
with CLIP that adds
Link 9.3 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.5 mi /
8 dB to SM
Budget 14.9 km 5.4 km 2.3 km
capability
(additional
5 dB link with Reflector Dish
PMP 450 loss) 26.3 mi / 9.6 mi / 4.1 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
AP19 42.0 km 15.4 km 6.6 km
SM capability
PMP 430
SM with Integrated SM 1.2 mi / 0.4 mi / 0.2 mi /
5.4GHz antenna 1.9 km 0.7 km 0.3 km
Max.
NLOS1 with CLIP that adds
2.9 mi / 1.1 mi / 0.5 mi /
Link 8 dB to SM
4.7 km 1.7 km 0.7 km
Budget capability
(additional
15 dB link with Reflector Dish
8.3 mi / 3.0 mi / 1.3 mi /
loss) that adds 17 dB to
13.3 km 4.9 km 2.1 km
SM capability
with Integrated SM 0.4 mi / 0.1 mi / 0.1 mi /
5.4GHz antenna 0.6 km 0.2 km 0.1 km
Max.
NLOS2 with CLIP that adds
0.9 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
Link 8 dB to SM
1.5 km 0.5 km 0.2 km
Budget capability
(additional
25 dB link with Reflector Dish
2.6 mi / 1.0 mi / 0.4 mi /
loss) that adds 17 dB to
4.2 km 1.5 km 0.7 km
SM capability

19
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.

2-42 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 49 Link budget details – 5.4 GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 10MHz Channel
Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 3x

Modulation QPSK-SISO 16-QAM-SISO 64-QAM-SISO

with Integrated SM 9.7 mi / 3.4 mi / 1.6 mi /


antenna 15.4 km 5.4 km 2.6 km
5.4GHz Max. with CLIP that adds
24.2 mi / 8.5 mi / 4.1 mi /
LOS Link 8 dB to SM
38.8 km 13.6 km 6.6 km
Budget (no capability
fade margin)
with Reflector Dish
40.0 mi / 24.0 mi / 11.6 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
64.0 km 38.3 km 18.6 km
SM capability
with Integrated SM 5.4 mi / 1.9 mi / 0.9 mi /
antenna 8.7 km 3.0 km 1.5 km
with CLIP that adds
13.6 mi / 4.8 mi / 2.3 mi /
5.4GHz Max. 8 dB to SM
21.8 km 7.7 km 3.7 km
nLOS Link capability
Budget with LENS that adds
(additional 5 4.2 mi / 1.9 mi / 0.8 mi /
5 dB to SM
dB link loss) 6.72 km 3.04 km 1.28 km
capability
PMP 450
AP20 with Reflector Dish
PMP 430 38.4 mi / 13.5 mi / 6.5 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
SM 61.5 km 21.6 km 10.4 km
SM capability
with Integrated SM 1.7 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi /
antenna 2.7 km 1.0 km 0.5 km
with CLIP that adds
4.3 mi / 1.5 mi / 0.7 mi /
5.4GHz Max. 8 dB to SM
6.9 km 2.4 km 1.2 km
NLOS1 Link capability
Budget with LENS that adds
(additional 15 1.3 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi /
5 dB to SM
dB link loss) 2.08 km 0.96 km 0.48 km
capability
with Reflector Dish
12.2 mi / 4.3 mi / 2.1 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
19.4 km 6.8 km 3.3 km
SM capability

5.4GHz Max. with Integrated SM 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi / 0.1 mi /


NLOS2 Link antenna 0.9 km 0.3 km 0.1 km
Budget
(additional 25 with CLIP that adds
1.4 mi / 0.5 mi / 0.2 mi /
dB link loss) 8 dB to SM
2.2 km 0.8 km 0.4 km
capability

20
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-43


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 3x
with Reflector Dish
3.8 mi / 1.3 mi / 0.7 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
6.1 km 2.2 km 1.0 km
SM capability

2-44 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 50 Link budget details – 5.4GHz PMP 450 AP and PMP 430 SM link, 5MHz Channel
Bandwidth

Range Details
Product Parameter
1x 2x 3x
16-QAM-
Modulation QPSK-SISO 64-QAM-SISO
SISO
with Integrated SM 13.9 mi / 4.5 mi / 2.2 mi /
antenna 22.3 km 7.1 km 3.6 km
5.4GHz Max. with CLIP that adds
35.0 mi / 11.2 mi / 5.6 mi /
LOS Link 8 dB to SM
56.0 km 17.9 km 9.0 km
Budget (no capability
fade margin)
with Reflector Dish
40.0 mi / 31.6 mi / 15.8 mi /
that adds 14 dB to
64.0 km 50.5 km 25.3 km
SM capability
with Integrated SM 7.8 mi / 2.5 mi / 1.3 mi /
antenna 12.5 km 4.0 km 2.0 km
5.4GHz Max.
with CLIP that adds
nLOS Link 19.7 mi / 6.3 mi / 3.2 mi /
8 dB to SM
Budget 31.5 km 10.1 km 5.1 km
capability
(additional 5
dB link loss) with Reflector Dish
40.0 mi / 17.8 mi / 8.9 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
PMP 450 64.0 km 28.4 km 14.2 km
SM capability
AP21
PMP 430 with Integrated SM 2.5 mi / 0.8 mi / 0.4 mi /
SM antenna 4.0 km 1.3 km 0.6 km
5.4GHz Max.
NLOS1 Link with CLIP that adds
6.2 mi / 2.0 mi / 1.0 mi /
Budget 8 dB to SM
10.0 km 3.2 km 1.6 km
(additional capability
15 dB link
loss) with Reflector Dish
17.5 mi / 5.6 mi / 2.8 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
28.1 km 9.0 km 4.5 km
SM capability
with Integrated SM 0.8 mi / 0.3 mi / 0.1 mi /
antenna 1.3 km 0.4 km 0.2 km
with CLIP that adds
5.4GHz Max. 2.0 mi / 0.6 mi / 0.3 mi /
8 dB to SM
NLOS2 Link 3.2 km 1.0 km 0.5 km
capability
Budget
(additional with LENS that
0.4 mi / 0.64 0.2 mi / 0.32 0.1 mi / 0.16
25 dB link adds 5.5 dB to SM
km km km
loss) capability
with Reflector Dish
5.5 mi / 1.8 mi / 0.9 mi /
that adds 17 dB to
8.9 km 2.8 km 1.4 km
SM capability

21
Transmit power complies with FCC regulatory requirements.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-45


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Path loss considerations


Path loss is the amount of attenuation the radio signal undergoes between the two ends of
the link.

Calculating path loss


The path loss is the sum of the attenuation of the path if there were no obstacles in the way
(Free Space Path Loss), the attenuation caused by obstacles (Excess Path Loss) and a
margin to allow for possible fading of the radio signal (Fade Margin). The following
calculation needs to be performed to judge whether a particular link can be installed:

L free _ space  Lexcess  L fade  Lseasonal  Lcapability

Where: Is:

L free _ space Free Space Path Loss (dB)

Lexcess Excess Path Loss (dB)

L fade Fade Margin Required (dB)

Lseasonal Seasonal Fading (dB)

Lcapability Equipment Capability (dB)

Calculating maximum power level for connectorized units


If a connectorized PMP 450 AP or SM is to be installed in a country that imposes an EIRP
limit in the selected band, calculate the highest setting of Maximum Power Level that is
permitted using this formula:
Maximum Power Level (dBm) = Allowed EIRP (dBm) – Antenna Gain (dBi) + Cable Loss (dB)
Where: Is:
Maximum Power the highest permissible setting of the
Level (dBm) transmitter output power,
Allowed EIRP the EIRP limit allowed by the regulations,
(dBm)

Antenna Gain the gain of the chosen antenna,


(dBi)
Cable Loss (dB) the loss of the RF cable connecting the AP
or SM to the antenna.
For more information on EIRP limits, see Compliance with radio regulations on page 4-19.

2-46 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Understanding Attenuation
RF signal in space is attenuated by atmospheric and other effects as a function of the
distance from the initial transmission point. Further the reception point is placed from the
transmission point weaker is the received RF signal.

Calculating Link Loss


The link loss is the total attenuation of the wireless signal between two point-to-multipoint
units. The link loss calculation is presented below:
Link Loss (dB) = Transmit power of the remote wireless unit (dBm) − Tx Cable loss
(dB) − Received power at the local unit (dBm) – Rx cable loss (dB) + Antenna gain at the
remote unit (dBi) + Antenna gain at the local unit (dBi)

Calculating Rx Signal Level


The determinants in Rx signal level are illustrated in Figure 15.
Figure 15 Determinants in Rx signal level

Rx signal level is calculated as follows:


Rx signal level dB = Tx power − Tx cable loss + Tx antenna gain
− free space path loss + Rx antenna gain − Rx cable loss

This Rx signal level calculation presumes that a clear line of sight is established between
the transmitter and receiver and that no objects encroach in the Fresnel zone.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-47


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Calculating Fade Margin


Free space path loss is a major determinant in Rx (received) signal level. Rx signal level, in
turn, is a major factor in the system operating margin (fade margin), which is calculated as
follows:
 System operating margin (fade margin) dB =Rx signal level dB − Rx sensitivity dB

Thus, fade margin is the difference between strength of the received signal and the strength
that the receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. A higher fade margin is
characteristic of a more reliable link.

Analyzing the RF Environment


An essential element in RF network planning is the analysis of spectrum usage and the
strength of the signals that occupy the spectrum you are planning to use. Regardless of how
you measure and log or chart the results you find (through the Spectrum Analyzer in SM
feature or by using a spectrum analyzer), you must do so:
 At various times of day.
 On various days of the week.
 Periodically into the future.

As new RF neighbors move in or consumer devices in your spectrum proliferate, this will
keep you aware of the dynamic possibilities for interference with your network.

Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies


These modules allow you to:
 Use a SM or an AP as a spectrum analyzer.
 View a graphical display that shows power level in RSSI and dBm at 5 MHz increments
throughout the frequency band range, regardless of limited selections in the Custom
Radio Frequency Scan Selection List parameter of the SM.
 Select an AP channel that minimizes interference from other RF equipment.

The following procedure causes the SM to drop any active RF link. If a link is dropped when the
spectrum analysis begins, the link can be re-established when either a 15-minute interval has elapsed
or the spectrum analyzer feature is disabled.

2-48 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Analyzing the spectrum


To use the built-in spectrum analyzer functionality of the Radio, proceed as follows:
Procedure 3 Analyzing the spectrum

1 Predetermine a power source and interface that works for the SM in the area you
want to analyze.

2 If possible, power down all the APs in the area or use the "Sector SA" Feature
3 Take the SM and interface device to the area.
4 Access the Tools web page of the SM or AP

5 Click Start Timed Spectrum Analysis


6 After 10 seconds, results are displayed:
Figure 16 Spectrum Analyzer

6 Travel to another location in the area.

7 Click Start Timed Spectrum Analysis


8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 until the area has been adequately scanned and logged.

As with any other data that pertains to your business, a decision today to put the data into a
retrievable database may grow in value to you over time. The Spectrum Analyzer contains
configurable parameters to fit your business requirements. Refer the PMP 450 Operations
Guide for more information.

Wherever you find the measured noise level is greater than the sensitivity of the radio that
you plan to deploy, use the noise level (rather than the link budget) for your link feasibility
calculations.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-49


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Anticipating Reflection of Radio Waves


In the signal path, any object that is larger than the wavelength of the signal can reflect the
signal. Such an object can even be the surface of the earth or of a river, bay, or lake. The
wavelength of the signal is approximately
 2 inches for 5.4 GHz and 5.8 GHz signals.
 3.4 inches for 3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz signals.
 4.9 inches for 2.4 GHz signals.
A reflected signal can arrive at the antenna of the receiver later than the non-reflected
signal arrives. These two or more signals cause the condition known as multipath. Multipath
may increase or decrease the signal level and so overall attenuation may be higher or lower
than that caused by the link distance. This is problematic at the margin of the link budget,
where the standard operating margin (fade margin) may be compromised.

Noting Possible Obstructions in the Fresnel Zone


The Fresnel (pronounced fre∙NEL) Zone is a three-dimensional volume around the line of
sight of an antenna transmission. Objects that penetrate this area can cause the received
strength of the transmitted signal to fade. Out-of-phase reflections and absorption of the
signal result in signal cancellation.
The foliage of trees and plants in the Fresnel Zone can cause signal loss. Seasonal density,
moisture content of the foliage, and other factors such as wind may change the amount of
loss. Plan to perform frequent and regular link tests if you must transmit through foliage.

2-50 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Multiple OFDM Access Point Clusters


When deploying multiple AP clusters in a dense area, consider aligning the clusters as
shown below. However, this is only a recommendation. An installation may dictate a
different pattern of channel assignments.
Figure 17 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABCD), 90 degree sectors

An example for assignment of frequency channels is provided in the following table.


See section Network migration planning on page 2-3 for more information on migrating to a
PMP 450 network.

Table 51 Example 5.8-GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector

Symbol Frequency

A 5.740 GHz

B 5.760 GHz

C 5.780 GHz

D 5.800 GHz

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-51


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 18 Example layout of 16 Access Point sectors (ABC), 60 degree sectors

An example for assignment of frequency channels and sector IDs is provided in the following
table.
See section Network migration planning on page 2-3 for more information on migrating to a
PMP 450 network.

Table 52 Example 5.8 GHz OFDM channel assignment by sector

Symbol Frequency

A 5.740 GHz

B 5.760 GHz

C 5.780 GHz

2-52 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Planning for co-location and using the OFDM Frame Calculator Tool
The first step to avoid interference in wireless systems is to set all APs to receive timing
from a synchronization source (Cluster Management Module, or Universal Global
Positioning System). This ensures that the modules are in sync and start transmitting at the
same time each frame.
The second step to avoid interference is to configure parameters on all APs of the same
frequency band in proximity such that they have compatible transmit/receive ratios (all stop
transmitting each frame before any start receiving). This avoids the problem of one AP
attempting to receive the signal from a distant SM while a nearby AP transmits, which could
overpower that signal.
The following parameters on the AP determine the transmit/receive ratio:
 Max Range
 Downlink Data percentage
 (reserved) Contention Slots

If OFDM (PMP 430, PMP 450, PTP 230) and FSK (PMP 1x0) APs of the same frequency band
are in proximity, or if you want APs set to different parameters (differing in their Max Range
values, for example), then you must use the Frame Calculator to identify compatible
settings.
The frame calculator is available on the Frame Calculator tab of the Tools web page.
To use the Frame Calculator, type into the calculator various configurable parameter values
for each proximal AP and then record the resulting AP Receive Start value. Next vary the
Downlink Data percentage in each calculation and iterate until the calculated AP Receive
Start for all collocated APs are within 300 bit times; if possible, within 150 bit times. In
Cambium Point-to-Multipoint systems, 10 bit times = 1 µs.
The calculator does not use values in the module or populate its parameters. It is merely a
convenience application that runs on a module. For this reason, you can use any FSK
module (AP, SM, BHM, BHS) to perform FSK frame calculations for setting the parameters
on an FSK AP and any OFDM module (AP, SM, BHM, BHS) to perform OFDM frame
calculations for setting the parameters on an OFDM AP.

IMPORTANT!
APs that have slightly mismatched transmit-to-receive ratios and low levels of data traffic
may see little effect on throughput. A system that was not tuned for co-location may work
fine at low traffic levels, but encounter problems at higher traffic levels. The conservative
practice is to tune for co-location before traffic ultimately increases. This prevents the
problems that occur as sectors are built.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-53


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 19 OFDM Frame Calculator tab

In the Frame Calculator tab, you can set the following parameters.
Table 53 OFDM Frame Calculator tab attributes

Attribute Meaning

Link Mode For AP to SM frame calculations, select Multipoint Link

Platform Type Use the drop-down list to select the hardware series
AP/BHM (board type) of the AP.

Platform Type Use the drop-down list to select the hardware series
SM/BHS (board type) of the SM.

Channel Bandwidth Set this to the channel bandwidth used in the AP.

Cyclic Prefix Set this to the cyclic prefix used in the AP.

Frame Period Select Frame Period of the AP (2.5 ms or 5 ms)

2-54 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Attribute Meaning

Max Range Set to the same value as the Max Range parameter is set
in the AP(s).

Air Delay This field must be left at the default of 0 ns.

Downlink Data Initially set this parameter to the same value that the AP
has for its Downlink Data parameter (percentage). Then,
as you use the Frame Calculator tool in Procedure 4, you
will vary the value in this parameter to find the proper
value to write into the Downlink Data parameter of all
APs in the cluster.
PMP 450 Series APs offer a range of 15% to 85%, and
default to 75%. The value that you set in this parameter
has the following interaction with the value of the Max
Range parameter (above):
The default Max Range value is 5 miles and, at that
distance, the maximum Downlink Data value (85% in
PMP450) is functional.

Contention Slots Set this parameter to the value of the Contention Slot
parameter is set in the APs.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-55


PMP 450 Planning Guide

The Calculated Frame Results display several items of interest:


Table 54 OFDM Calculated Frame Results attributes

Attribute Meaning

Modulation The type of radio modulation used in the calculation


(OFDM for PMP 450)

Total Frame Bits The total number of bits used in the calculated frames

Data Slots (Down/Up) This field is based on the Downlink Data setting. For
example, a result within the typical range for a Downlink
Data setting of 75% is 61/21, meaning 61 data slots down
and 21 data slots up.

Air Delay for Max This is the roundtrip air delay in bit times for the Max
Range Range value set in the calculator.

Approximate distance The Max Range value used for frame calculation.
for Max Range

AP Antenna Transmit In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP
End ceases transmission.

AP Antenna Receive In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP is
Start ready to receive transmission from the SM.

AP Receive End In bit times, this is the frame position at which the AP will
cease receiving transmission from the SM.

SM Receive End In bit times, this is the frame position at which the SM will
cease receiving transmission from the AP.

SM Transmit Start In bit times, this is the frame position at which the SM
starts transmission.

SM One Way Air This filed displays the time in ns, that BHS/SM is away
Delay from the BHM/AP.

SM Approximate This field displays an approximate distance in miles (feet)


distance that the BHS/SM is away from the BHM/AP.

To use the Frame Calculator to ensure that all APs are configured to transmit and receive at
the same time, see Procedure 4.

2-56 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Procedure 4 Using the Frame Calculator

1 Populate the OFDM Frame Calculator parameters with appropriate


values as described above.
2 Click the Calculate button.
3 Scroll down the tab to the Calculated Frame Results section
4 Record the value of the AP Receive Start field
5 Enter a parameter set from another AP in the system – for example,
an AP in the same cluster that has a higher Max Range value
configured.
6 Click the Calculate button.
7 Scroll down the tab to the Calculated Frame Results section
8 If the recorded values of the AP Receive Start fields are within 150
bit times of each other, skip to step 10.
9 If the recorded values of the AP Receive Start fields are not within
150 bit times of each other, modify the Downlink Data parameter
until the calculated results for AP Receive Start are within 300 bit
time of each other, if possible, 150 bit time.
10 Access the Radio tab in the Configuration web page of each AP in the
cluster and change its Downlink Data parameter (percentage) to the
last value that was used in the Frame Calculator.

Selecting Sites for Network Elements


The APs must be positioned as instructed below:
 With hardware that the wind and ambient vibrations cannot flex or move.
 Where a tower or rooftop is available or can be erected.
 Where a grounding system is available.
 With lightning arrestors to transport lightning strikes away from equipment.
 At a proper height, such as:
o Higher than the tallest points of objects immediately around them (such as trees,
buildings, and tower legs).
o At least 2 feet (0.6 meters) below the tallest point on the tower, pole, or roof (for
lightning protection).
 Away from high-RF energy sites (such as AM or FM stations, high-powered antennas,
and live AM radio towers).
 In line-of-sight paths:
o To the SMs.
o That is not obstructed by trees as they grow or structures that are later built.

Visual line of sight does not guarantee radio line of sight.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-57


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Surveying Sites
Factors to survey at potential sites include the following:
 What pre-existing wireless equipment exists at the site. (Perform spectrum analysis.)
 Whether available mounting positions exist near the lowest elevation that satisfies line of
site, coverage, and other link criteria.
 Whether you will always have the right to decide who climbs the tower to install and
maintain your equipment, and whether that person or company can climb at any hour of
any day.
 Whether you will have collaborative rights and veto power to prevent interference to
your equipment from wireless equipment that is installed at the site in the future.
 Whether a pre-existing grounding system (path to Protective Earth ) exists and what is
required to establish a path to it.
 Who is permitted to run any indoor lengths of cable.

Clearing the Radio Horizon


Because the surface of the earth is curved, higher module elevations are required for
greater link distances. This effect can be critical to link connectivity in link spans that are
greater than 8 miles (12 km).
To use metric units to find the minimum height required to reach the radio horizon use the
following equation:
Radio horizon distance (km) = 4.12 (SQRT(h1) + SQRT(h2))
Where: Is:
h1 height of the AP
h2 height of the SM

To use English standard units to find the angle of elevation, use the following formula:
Radio horizon distance (km) = 1.42 (SQRT(h1) + SQRT(h2))

Where: Is:
h1 height of the AP
h2 height of the SM

2-58 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Calculating the Aim Angles


The proper angle of tilt can be calculated as a factor of both the difference in elevation and
the distance that the link spans. Even in this case, a plumb line and a protractor can be
helpful to ensure the proper tilt. This tilt is typically minimal.
The number of degrees to offset (from vertical) the mounting hardware leg of the support
tube is equal to the angle of elevation from the lower module to the higher module (<B in
the example provided in Figure 20).
Figure 20 Variables for calculating angle of elevation (and depression)

Where: Is:
b angle of elevation
B vertical difference in elevation
A horizontal distance between modules

Calculating the Angle of Elevation


To use metric units to find the angle of elevation, use the following formula:
B
tan b =
1000A
Where: Is:
B expressed in meters
A expressed in kilometers

To use English standard units to find the angle of elevation, use the following formula:
B
tan b =
5280A
Where: Is:
B expressed in feet
A expressed in miles

The angle of depression from the higher module is identical to the angle of elevation from
the lower module.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-59


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Diagramming Network Layouts


Avoiding Self Interference
The following section includes information maximizing tower performance by minimizing
self-interference.

Physical Proximity
Two AP clusters co-located on the same tower require a CMM. The CMM properly
synchronizes the transmit start times of all modules to prevent interference and de-sensing
of the modules. At closer distances without GPS synchronization, the frame structures cause
self-interference. Non-synchronized deployments are highly discouraged.
Furthermore, non-synchronized APs on the same tower require that the effects of their
differing receive start times be mitigated by either
 100 vertical feet (30 meters) or more and as much spectral separation as possible within
the same frequency band range
 the use of the frame calculator to tune the Downlink Data parameter in each, so that
the receive start time in each is the same
The constraints for collocated modules in the same frequency band range are to avoid self-
interference that may occur between them. Specifically, unless the uplink and downlink data
percentages match, intervals exist when one is transmitting while the other is receiving,
such that the receiving module cannot receive the signal from the far end.
The interference is less a problem during low throughput periods and intolerable during
high. Typically, during low throughput periods, sufficient time exists for the far end to
retransmit packets lost because of interference from the collocated module.

Spectrum Analysis
You can use a SM as a spectrum analyzer. See Mapping RF Neighbor Frequencies on Page
2-48.

SM Automatic Transmit Power Control


The PMP 450 AP automatically sets the transmitter output power in its SMs through a
feature named Auto-TPC (Transmit Power Control). The conceptual reason for this feature is
OFDM reception in the AP is sensitive to large differences in power levels received from its
SMs, and by limiting power levels of close-in SMs the overall RF noise floor is lowered.

2-60 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Avoiding Other Interference


Where signal strength cannot dominate noise levels, the network experiences:
 Packet errors and retransmissions.
 Lower throughput (because bandwidth is consumed by retransmissions) and high
latency (due to resends).
Regular spectrum analysis is critical to RF planning. The integrated spectrum analyzer can
be very useful as a tool for troubleshooting and RF planning, but is not intended to replicate
the accuracy and programmability of a high-end spectrum analyzer, which you may
sometime need for other purposes.

When you enable the Spectrum Analyzer on a module, it enters a scan mode and drops any
RF connection it may have had. Scanning mode ends when either you click Disable on the
Spectrum Analyzer page, or it times out after 15 minutes and returns to operational mode.
For this reason:
1. Do not enable the spectrum analyzer on a module you are connected to via RF. The
connection will drop for 15 minutes, and when the connection is re-established no
readings are displayed.
2. Be advised that, if you enable the spectrum analyzer by Ethernet connection, the RF
connection to that module drops.

You can use any module to see the frequency and power level of any detectable signal that
is within, just above, or just below the frequency band range of the module.

Vary the days and times when you analyze the spectrum in an area.
The RF environment can change throughout the day or throughout the week.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-61


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Grounding and lightning protection


This section describes the grounding and lightning protection requirements of a PMP 450
installation.

Electro-magnetic discharge (lightning) damage is not covered under warranty.


The recommendations in this guide, when followed correctly, give the user the
best protection from the harmful effects of EMD. However 100% protection is
neither implied nor possible.

The need for power surge protection


Structures, equipment and people must be protected against power surges (typically caused
by lightning) by conducting the surge current to ground via a separate preferential solid
path. The actual degree of protection required depends on local conditions and applicable
local regulations. Cambium recommends that PMP 450 installation is contracted to a
professional installer.

Standards
Full details of lightning protection methods and requirements can be found in the
international standards IEC 61024-1 and IEC 61312-1, the U.S. National Electric Code
ANSI/NFPA No. 70-1984 or section 54 of the Canadian Electric Code.

2-62 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Lightning protection zones


The ‘rolling sphere method’ (Figure 21) is used to determine where it is safe to mount
equipment. An imaginary sphere, typically 50 meters in radius, is rolled over the structure.
Where the sphere rests against the ground and a strike termination device (such as a finial
or ground bar), all the space under the sphere is considered to be in the zone of protection
(Zone B). Similarly, where the sphere rests on two finials, the space under the sphere is
considered to be in the zone of protection.
Figure 21 Rolling sphere method to determine the lightning protection zones

Assess locations on masts, towers and buildings to determine if the location is in Zone A or
Zone B:
 Zone A: In this zone a direct lightning strike is possible. Do not mount equipment in this
zone.
 Zone B: In this zone, direct EMD (lightning) effects are still possible, but mounting in
this zone significantly reduces the possibility of a direct strike. Mount equipment in this
zone.

Never mount equipment in Zone A. Mounting in Zone A may put equipment,


structures and life at risk.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-63


PMP 450 Planning Guide

General protection requirements


To adequately protect a PMP 450 installation for both ground bonding and transient voltage,
surge suppression are required.

Basic requirements
The following basic protection requirements must be implemented:
 The equipment must be in ‘Zone B’ (see Lightning protection zones on page 2-63).
 The AP must be grounded to the supporting structure.
 A surge suppression unit (600SS) must be installed close to the SM.
 The distance between the SM and 600SS must be kept to a minimum.
 The drop cable length between the SM and 600SS must be less than 600 mm.
 A surge suppression unit (600SS) must be installed within 600 mm (24 in) of the point at
which the power cable enters the building or equipment room.
 The drop cable must be grounded at the building entry point.
 The drop cable must not be laid alongside a lightning air terminal.
 All grounding cables must be a minimum size of 10 mm2 csa (8AWG), preferably 16 mm2
csa (6AWG), or 25 mm2 csa (4AWG).

Grounding cable requirements


When routing, fastening and connecting grounding cables, the following requirements must
be implemented:
 Grounding conductors must be run as short, straight, and smoothly as possible, with the
fewest possible number of bends and curves.
 Grounding cables must not be installed with drip loops.
 All bends must have a minimum radius of 203 mm (8 in) and a minimum angle of 90°
(Figure 22). A diagonal run is preferable to a bend, even though it does not follow the
contour or run parallel to the supporting structure.
 All bends, curves and connections must be routed towards the grounding electrode
system, ground rod, or ground bar.
 Grounding conductors must be securely fastened.
 Braided grounding conductors must not be used.
 Approved bonding techniques must be used for the connection of dissimilar metals.

2-64 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 22 Grounding cable minimum bend radius and angle

Protection requirements for a mast or tower installation


If the AP or SM is to be mounted on a metal tower or mast, then in addition to the general
protection requirements (above), the following requirements must be observed:
 The equipment must be lower than the top of the tower or its lightning air terminal.
 The metal tower or mast must be correctly grounded.
 A grounding kit must be installed at the first point of contact (top), between the drop
cable and the tower.
 A grounding kit must be installed at the bottom of the tower, near the vertical to
horizontal transition point. This grounding kit must be bonded to the tower or tower
ground bus bar (TGB), if installed.
Schematic examples of mast or tower installations are shown in Figure 23.
Figure 23 Grounding and lightning protection on mast or tower

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-65


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Protection requirements for a wall installation


If the SM is to be mounted on the wall of a building, then in addition to the general
protection requirements (above), the following requirements must be observed:
 The equipment must be lower than the top of the building or its lightning air terminal.
 The building must be correctly grounded.
Schematic examples of wall installations are shown in Figure 24.

Figure 24 Grounding and lightning protection on wall

2-66 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Protection requirements on a high rise building


If the AP is to be mounted on a high rise building, it is likely that cable entry is at roof level
(Figure 25) and the equipment room is several floors below (Figure 26). The following
additional requirements must be observed:
 The AP must be below the lightning terminals and finials.
 A grounding conductor must be installed around the roof perimeter, to form the main
roof perimeter lightning protection ring.
 Air terminals are typically installed along the length of the main roof perimeter lightning
protection ring typically every 6.1m (20ft).
 The main roof perimeter lightning protection ring must contain at least two down
conductors connected to the grounding electrode system. The down conductors must be
physically separated from one another, as far as practical.

Figure 25 Grounding and lightning protection on building

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-67


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Protection inside a high rise building


The following protection requirements must be observed inside multi-story or high rise
buildings (Figure 26):
 The drop cable shield must be bonded to the building grounding system at the entry
point to the building.
 The drop cable shield must be bonded to the building grounding system at the entry
point to the equipment area.

Figure 26 Grounding and lightning protection inside high building

2-68 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Configuration options for TDD synchronization


The PMP 450 system uses Time Division Duplexing (TDD) - one channel alternately
transmits and receives - rather than using one channel for transmitting and a second
channel for receiving. To accomplish TDD, the AP must provide sync to its SMs – it must
keep them in sync. Furthermore, collocated APs must be synced together - an
unsynchronized AP that transmits during the receive cycle of a collocated AP can prevent
that second AP from being able to decode the signals from its SMs. In addition, across a
geographical area, APs that can “hear” each other benefit from using a common sync to
further reduce self-interference within the network.
The configuration options available for synchronization on the PMP 450 Access Point are:
 AutoSync: The AP automatically receives sync from one of the following sources:
o GPS Sync over Timing Port (UGPS, co-located AP GPS sync output, or “Remote AP”
feed from a registered SM’s GPS sync output)
o GPS Sync over Power Port (CMM)
o On-board GPS (internal GPS)
Upon AP power on, the AP does not transmit until a valid synchronization pulse is
received from one of the sources above. When there are synchronization sources on
both the timing port and the power port, the power port GPS source is chosen first.
If there is a loss of GPS synchronization pulse, within two seconds the AP automatically
attempts to source GPS signaling from another source. On-board GPS (internal GPS) is
the last source checked for GPS signaling if there is no receipt of signaling from the
timing port or from the power port. AutoSync will source timing from the on-board GPS
if a valid synchronization pulse is detected (the on-board GPS module must not be used
as the primary timing source). If no valid GPS signal is received, the AP ceases
transmission and SM registration is lost until a valid GPS signal is received again on the
AP.
 AutoSync + Free Run: This mode operates similarly to mode “AutoSync”, but if a
previously received synchronization signal is lost and no GPS signaling alternative is
achieved (from the timing port, power port, or on-board GPS), the AP automatically
changes to synchronization mode “Generate Sync”. While SM registration ins
maintained, in this mode there is no synchronization of APs that can “hear” each other;
the AP will only generate a sync signal for the local AP and its associated SMs. Once a
valid GPS signal is obtained again, the AP automatically switches to receiving
synchronization via the GPS source and SM registration is maintained.

In mode AutoSync + Free Run, if a GPS signal is never achieved initially, the system does
not switch to “Free Run” mode, and SMs do not register to the AP. A valid GPS signal must
be present initially for the AP to switch into “Free Run” mode (and to begin self-generating
a synchronization pulse).

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-69


PMP 450 Planning Guide

 Generate Sync (factory default): This option may be used when the AP is not receiving
GPS synchronization pulses from either a CMM or UGPS module, and there are no other
APs active within the link range. Using this option does not synchronize transmission of
APs that can “hear” each other; it will only generate a sync signal for the local AP and its
associated SMs. See Advantage of GPS synchronization on page 2-71.

GPS synchronization
The Navigation Satellite Timing and Ranging (NAVSTAR) and Global Positioning System
(GPS) use 24 satellites to relay information for precise derivation of position and time.
The cluster management module (CMM) contains a Cambium GPS Receiver. The CMM is a
critical element in the operation of the system. At one AP cluster site or throughout an
entire wireless system, the CMM provides a GPS timing pulse to each module,
synchronizing the network transmission cycles.
The Oncore GPS Receiver tracks eight or more NAVSTAR satellites. The CMM uses the
signal from at least four of these satellites to generate a one-second interval clock that has a
rise time of 100 nsec. This clock directly synchronizes APs and which, in turn, synchronize
the SMs in the network.
The Oncore GPS Receiver also provides:
 The latitude and longitude of the GPS antenna (collocated with the CMM)
 The number of satellites that are being tracked
 The number of satellites that are available
 The date
 The time in Universal Coordinated Time (UCT)
 The altitude of the GPS antenna
 Other information that can be used to diagnose network problems.

Alternative to GPS synchronization


A link can operate without GPS sync, but cannot operate without sync. The alternative to
GPS sync is to configure the AP in the link to generate a sync pulse to pass to the SM.
Depending on the RF environment in which the link operates, this latter alternative may or
may not be plausible.
For example, in Figure 27, AP4:
 Is not synchronized with any of the other APs.
 Is transmitting nearby the other APs while they are expecting to receive SM
transmissions from a maximum distance.

2-70 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 27 One unsynchronized AP in cluster resulting in self-interference

The result is self-interference. In this scenario, the self-interference can be avoided only by
synchronizing the TDD transmit cycles of all APs that operate in the same frequency band.
An AP that is isolated by at least 5 miles (8 km) from any other equipment can generate and
pass sync pulse without GPS timing and not risk that interference will result from the
generated sync. In any other type of link, sync must be derived from GPS timing.

Advantage of GPS synchronization


Although the embedded timing generation capability of the AP keeps a precise clock
(configuration parameter Sync Input set to Generate Sync Signal), no trigger exists to
start the clock at the same moment in each AP of a cluster. So, the individual AP can
synchronize communications between itself and registered SMs, but cannot synchronize
itself with other modules, except by GPS timing (shown in Figure 28).
Figure 28 GPS timing throughout the network

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-71


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Mounting the GPS receiver (CMM or UGPS) module on the equipment


building
If mounting the GPS receiver on the equipment building, select a position on the wall that
meets the following requirements:
 It must be below the roof height of the equipment building or below the height of any
roof-mounted equipment (such as air conditioning plant).
 It must be below the lightning air terminals.
 It must not project more than 600mm (24 inches) from the wall of the building.
If these requirements cannot all be met, then the module must be mounted on a metal tower
or mast.

Mounting the GPS receiver (CMM or UGPS) module on a metal tower


or mast
If mounting the GPS receiver module on a metal tower or mast, select a position that meets
the following requirements:
 It must not be mounted any higher than is necessary to receive an adequate signal from
four GPS satellites.
 It must be protected by a nearby lightning air terminal that projects farther out from the
tower than the GPS receiver module.
 It must meet all the requirements stated in Protection requirements for a mast or tower
installation on page 2-65.

2-72 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Data network planning


This section describes factors to be considered when planning PMP 450 data networks.

Understanding addresses
A basic understanding of Internet Protocol (IP) address and subnet mask concepts is
required for engineering your IP network.

IP address
The IP address is a 32-bit binary number that has four parts (octets). This set of four octets
has two segments, depending on the class of IP address. The first segment identifies the
network. The second identifies the hosts or devices on the network. The subnet mask marks
a boundary between these two sub-addresses.

Dynamic or static addressing


For any computer to communicate with a module, the computer must be configured to
either
 use DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). In this case, when not connected to
the network, the computer derives an IP address on the 169.254 network within two
minutes.
 have an assigned static IP address (for example, 169.254.1.5) on the 169.254 network.

If an IP address that is set in the module is not the 169.254.x.x network address, then the
network operator must assign the computer a static IP address in the same subnet.

When a DHCP server is not found


To operate on a network, a computer requires an IP address, a subnet mask, and possibly a
gateway address. Either a DHCP server automatically assigns this configuration information
to a computer on a network or an operator must input these items.
When a computer is brought on line and a DHCP server is not accessible (such as when the
server is down or the computer is not plugged into the network), Microsoft and Apple
operating systems default to an IP address of 169.254.x.x and a subnet mask of 255.255.0.0
(169.254/16, where /16 indicates that the first 16 bits of the address range are identical
among all members of the subnet).

DNS Client
The DNS Client is used to resolve names of management servers within the operator’s
management domain (see Figure 29). This feature allows hostname configuration for NTP
servers, Authorization Servers, DHCP relay servers, and SNMP trap servers. Operators may
choose to either enter in the FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) for the host name or to
manually enter the IP addresses of the servers.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-73


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 29 Cambium networks management domain

Network Address Translation (NAT)


NAT, DHCP Server, DHCP Client and DMZ in SM
The system provides NAT (network address translation) for SMs in the following
combinations of NAT and DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol):
 NAT Disabled
 NAT with DHCP Client (DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface)
and DHCP Server
 NAT with DHCP Client(DHCP selected as the Connection Type of the WAN interface)
 NAT with DHCP Server
 NAT without DHCP

NAT
NAT isolates devices connected to the Ethernet/wired side of a SM from being seen directly
from the wireless side of the SM. With NAT enabled, the SM has an IP address for transport
traffic (separate from its address for management), terminates transport traffic, and allows
you to assign a range of IP addresses to devices that are connected to the Ethernet/wired
side of the SM.
In the Cambium system, NAT supports many protocols, including HTTP, ICMP (Internet
Control Message Protocols), and FTP (File Transfer Protocol). For virtual private network
(VPN) implementation, L2TP over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security) and
PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) are supported.

When NAT is enabled, a reduction in throughput is introduced at the SM (due to


processing overhead).

2-74 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

DHCP
DHCP enables a device to be assigned a new IP address and TCP/IP parameters, including a
default gateway, whenever the device reboots. Thus DHCP reduces configuration time,
conserves IP addresses, and allows modules to be moved to a different network within the
Cambium system.
In conjunction with the NAT features, each SM provides:
 A DHCP server that assigns IP addresses to computers connected to the SM by Ethernet
protocol.
 A DHCP client that receives an IP address for the SM from a network DHCP server.

DMZ
In conjunction with the NAT features, a DMZ (demilitarized zone) allows the assignment of
one IP address behind the SM for a device to logically exist outside the firewall and receive
network traffic. The first three octets of this IP address must be identical to the first three
octets of the NAT private IP address.

Developing an IP addressing scheme


Network elements are accessed through IP Version 4 (IPv4) addressing.
A proper IP addressing method is critical to the operation and security of a network.
Each module requires an IP address on the network. This IP address is for only management
purposes. For security, you must either:
 Assign a non-routable IP address.
 Assign a routable IP address only if a firewall is present to protect the module.
You assign an IP addresses to computers and network components by either static or
dynamic IP addressing. You will also assign the appropriate subnet mask and network
gateway to each module.

Address Resolution Protocol


As previously stated, the MAC address identifies a module in:
 Communications between modules.
 The data that modules store about each other.

The IP address is essential for data delivery through a router interface. Address Resolution
Protocol (ARP) correlates MAC addresses to IP addresses.
For communications to outside the network segment, ARP reads the network gateway
address of the router and translates it into the MAC address of the router. Then the
communication is sent to MAC address (physical network interface card) of the router.
For each router between the sending module and the destination, this sequence applies. The
ARP correlation is stored until the ARP cache times out.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-75


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Allocating subnets
The subnet mask is a 32-bit binary number that filters the IP address. Where a subnet mask
contains a bit set to 1, the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network
address.

Example IP address and subnet mask


In Figure 30, the first 16 bits of the 32-bit IP address identify the network:
Figure 30 Example of IP address in Class B subnet
Octet 1 Octet 2 Octet 3 Octet 4
IP address 169.254.1.1 10101001 11111110 00000001 00000001
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0 11111111 11111111 00000000 00000000
In this example, the network address is 169.254 and 216 (65,536) hosts are addressable.

Selecting non-routable IP addresses


The factory default assignments for network elements are:
 Unique MAC address
 IP address of 169.254.1.1
 Subnet mask of 255.255.0.0
 Network gateway address of 169.254.0.0
For each radio and CMMmicro and CMM4, assign an IP address that is both consistent
with the IP addressing plan for your network and cannot be accessed from the Internet. IP
addresses within the following ranges are not routable from the Internet, regardless of
whether a firewall is configured:
 10.0.0.0 – 10.255.255.255
 172.16.0.0 – 172.31.255.255
 192.168.0.0 – 192.168.255.255

You can also assign a subnet mask and network gateway for each CMMmicro and CMM4.

Translation bridging
Optionally, you can configure the AP to change the source MAC address in every packet it
receives from its SMs to the MAC address of the SM that bridged the packet, before
forwarding the packet toward the public network. If you do, then:
 Not more than 10 IP devices at any time are valid to send data to the AP from behind the
SM.
 AP populates the Translation Table tab of its Statistics web page, displaying the MAC
address and IP address of all the valid connected devices.
 Each entry in the Translation Table is associated with the number of minutes that have
elapsed since the last packet transfer between the connected device and the SM.
 If 10 are connected, and another attempts to connect:
o If no Translation Table entry is older than 255 minutes, the attempt is ignored.

2-76 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

o If an entry is older than 255 minutes, the oldest entry is removed and the attempt is
successful.
 the Send Untranslated ARP parameter in the General tab of the Configuration page
can be:
o Disabled, so that the AP overwrites the MAC address in ARP packets before
forwarding them.
o Enabled, so that the AP forwards ARP packets regardless of whether it has
overwritten the MAC address.
This is the Translation Bridging feature, which you can enable in the General tab of
the Configuration web page in the AP. When this feature is disabled, the setting of the
Send Untranslated ARP parameter has no effect, because all packets are forwarded
untranslated (with the source MAC address intact). See Address Resolution Protocol on
Page 2-75.

Engineering VLANs
The radios support VLAN functionality as defined in the 802.1Q (Virtual LANs) specification,
except for the following aspects of that specification:
 the following protocols:
o Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) GARV
o Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
o Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
o GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
 embedded source routing (ERIF) in the 802.1Q header
 multicast pruning
 flooding unknown unicast frames in the downlink

As an additional exception, the AP does not flood downward the unknown unicast frames to
the SM.
A VLAN configuration in Layer 2 establishes a logical group within the network. Each
computer in the VLAN, regardless of initial or eventual physical location, has access to the
same data. For the network operator, this provides flexibility in network segmentation,
simpler management, and enhanced security.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-77


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Special case VLAN numbers


This system handles special case VLAN numbers according to IEEE specifications:
Table 55 Special case VLAN IDs

VLAN Number Purpose Usage Constraint

Must not be used


These packets have 802.1p priority, but are
0 as a management
otherwise handled as untagged.
VLAN.

Although not noted as special case by IEEE


specifications, these packets identify traffic that Must not be used
1 was untagged upon ingress into the SM and for system VLAN
must remain untagged upon egress. This policy traffic.
is hard-coded in the AP.

Must not be used


4095 This VLAN is reserved for internal use.
at all.

SM membership in VLANs
With the supported VLAN functionality, the radios determine bridge forwarding on the basis
of not only the destination MAC address, but also the VLAN ID of the destination. This
provides flexibility in how SMs are used:
 Each SM can be a member in its own VLAN.
 Each SM can be in its own broadcast domain, such that only the radios that are
members of the VLAN can see broadcast and multicast traffic to and from the SM.
 The network operator can define a work group of SMs, regardless of the AP(s) to which
they register.
PMP modules provide the VLAN frame filters that are described in Table 56.
Table 56 VLAN filters in point-to-multipoint modules

Priority on VLANs (802.1p)


The radios can prioritize traffic based on the eight priorities described in the IEEE 802.1p
specification. When the high-priority channel is enabled on a SM, regardless of whether
VLAN is enabled on the AP for the sector, packets received with a priority of 4 through 7 in
the 802.1p field are forwarded onto the high-priority channel.
Operators may configure priority precedence as 802.1p Then Diffserv (Default) or Diffserv
Then 802.1p. Since these priority precedence configurations are independent between the
AP and SM, this setting must be configured on both the AP and the SM to ensure that the
precedence is adhered to by both sides of the link.
VLAN settings can also cause the module to convert received non-VLAN packets into VLAN
packets. In this case, the 802.1p priority in packets leaving the module is set to the priority
established by the DiffServ configuration.
If you enable VLAN, immediately monitor traffic to ensure that the results are as desired.
For example, high-priority traffic may block low-priority.

2-78 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

then a frame is discarded if…


Where VLAN is
active, entering the bridge/ because of this VLAN
if this parameter NAT switch through… filter in the software:
value is selected …
Ethernet… TCP/IP…

with a VID not


any combination of
in the
VLAN Ingress
membership
parameter settings
table

with a VID not


any combination of
in the
VLAN Local Ingress
membership
parameter settings
table

Allow Frame Types: with no 802.1Q


Only Tagged
Tagged Frames Only tag

with an 802.1Q
Allow Frame Types:
tag,
Untagged Frames Only Untagged
regardless of
Only
VID

Local SM
Management: with an 802.1Q
Disable in the SM, or tag and a VID in
Local SM Management
All Local SM the membership
Management: table
Disable in the AP

leaving the bridge/


NAT switch through…

Ethernet… TCP/IP…

with a VID not


any combination of
in the
VLAN Egress
membership
parameter settings
table

with a VID not


any combination of
in the
VLAN Local Egress
membership
parameter settings
table

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-79


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Q-in-Q DVLAN (Double-VLAN) Tagging (802.1ad)


PMP modules can be configured with 802.1ad Q-in-Q DVLAN (Double-VLAN) tagging which
is a way for an operator to put an 802.1Q VLAN inside of an 802.1ad VLAN. A nested VLAN,
which is the original 802.1Q tag and a new second 802.1ad tag, allows for bridging of VLAN
traffic across a network and segregates the broadcast domains of 802.1Q VLANs. Q-in-Q
can be used with PPPoE and/or NAT.
The 802.1ad standard defines the S-VLAN as the Service Provider VLAN and the C-VLAN as
the customer VLAN. The radio software does 2 layer Q-in-Q whereby the C-VLAN is the
802.1Q tag and the S-VLAN is the second layer Q tag as shown in Table 57.
Table 57 Q-in-Q Ethernet frame

Ethernet S-VLAN C-VLAN


IP Data EthType 0x0800
Header EthType 0x88a8 EthType 0x8100

The 802.1ad S-VLAN is the outer VLAN that is configurable on the Configuration => VLAN
web page of the AP. The Q-in-Q EtherType parameter is configured with a default
EtherType of 0x88a8 in addition to four alternate EtherTypes that can be configured to aid
in interoperability with existing networks that use a different EtherType than the default.
The C-VLAN is the inner VLAN tag, which is the same as 802.1Q. As a top level concept, this
operates on the outermost tag at any given time, either “pushing” a tag on or “popping” a
tag off. This means packets will at most transition from an 802.1Q frame to an 801.ad frame
(with a tag “pushed” on) or an untagged 802.1 frame (with the tag “popped” off. Similarly,
for an 802.1ad frame, this can only transition from an 802.1ad frame to an 802.1Q frame
(with the tag “popped” off) since the radio software only supports 2 levels of tags.

2-80 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Security planning
This section describes how to plan for PMP 450 networks to operate in secure mode.

Isolating APs from the Internet


Ensure that the IP addresses of the APs in your network
 are not routable over the Internet.
 do not share the subnet of the IP address of your user.

RFC 1918, Address Allocation for Private Subnets, reserves for private IP networks three
blocks of IP addresses that are not routable over the Internet:
 /8 subnets have one reserved network, 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255.
 /16 subnets have 16 reserved networks, 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255.
 /24 subnets have 256 reserved networks, 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255.

Managing module access by passwords


Adding a user for access to a module
From the factory, each module has a preconfigured administrator-level account in the name
root, which initially requires no associated password. When you upgrade a module:
 An account is created in the name admin.
 Both admin and root inherit the password that was previously used to access the
module, if:
o Full Access password, if one was set.
o Display-Only Access password, if one was set and no Full Access password was set.

If you use Wireless Manager, do not delete the root account from any module. If you use a
NMS that communicates with modules through SNMP, do not delete the root account from
any module unless you first can confirm that the NMS does not rely on the root account for
access to the modules.

Each module supports four or fewer user accounts, regardless of account levels. The
available levels are
 ADMINISTRATOR, who has full read and write permissions. This is the level of the root
and admin users, as well as any other administrator accounts that one of them creates.
 INSTALLER, who has permissions identical to those of ADMINISTRATOR except that the
installer cannot add or delete users or change the password of any other user.
 TECHNICIAN, who
 GUEST, who has no write permissions and only a limited view of General Status tab. The
ability to view information of General Status tab can be controlled by the "Site
Information Viewable to Guest Users" under the SNMP tab.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-81


PMP 450 Planning Guide

 Admin, Installer and Tech accounts can be configured as "Read-Only". This will allow
the account to only see the items listed in Table 58 below.
From the factory default state, configure passwords for both the root and admin account at
the ADMINISTRATOR permission level, using the Account => Change Users Password
tab. (If you configure only one of these, then the other will still require no password for
access into it and thus remain a security risk.) If you are intent on configuring only one of
them, delete the admin account. The root account is the only account that CNUT uses to
update the module.
After a password has been set for any ADMINISTRATOR-level account, initial access to the
module GUI opens the view of GUEST level.
Table 58 Identity-based user account permissions - AP

Menu Menu Tab ADMIN INSTALLER TECH


Home General Status
Session Status
Remote Subscribers
Event Log
Network Interface
Layer2 Neighbors
Sync Status
Configuration General
IP
Radio
SNMP
Quality of Service (QoS)
Security
Time
VLAN
VLAN Membership
DiffServ
Protocol Filtering
Port Configuration
Syslog
Unit Settings
Statistics Scheduler
SM Registration Failures
Bridge Control Block
Bridging Table
Ethernet
Radio
VLAN
Data VC

2-82 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Throughput
Filter
ARP
Overload
DHCP Relay
Pass Through Statistics
DNS Statistics
Syslog Statistics
Frame Utilization
Tools Link Capacity Test
Spectrum Analyzer
FSK Frame Calculator
OFDM Frame Calculator
Subscriber Configuration
Link Status
Remote Spectrum Analyzer
Sessions
DNS Test
Logs AP Sessions
AP Authentication State
Machine Log
AP Authorization State
Machine Log
EAP Radius Log
User Authentication And
Accounts Access Tracking
Change User Password
Add User
Delete User
Quick Start Quick Start
Region Settings
Radio Carrier Frequency
Synchronization
LAN IP Address
Review and Save
Configuration
Copyright Copyright Notices
Logoff

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-83


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 59 Identity-based user account permissions - SM

INSTALLE
Menu Menu Tab ADMIN R TECH
Home General Status
Event Log
Network Interface
Layer2 Neighbors
Configuratio
n General
IP
Radio
SNMP
Quality of Service (QoS)
Security
VLAN
VLAN Membership
DiffServ
Protocol Filtering
Port Configuration
NAT
PPPoE
NAT Port Mapping
Syslog
Unit Settings
Statistics Scheduler
Bridge Control Block
Bridging Table
Translation Table
Ethernet
Radio
VLAN
Data VC
Filter
NAT Stats
NAT DHCP
ARP
Overload
PPPoE Statistics
Peer Statistics
DNS Statistics
Syslog Statistics

2-84 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Tools Spectrum Analyzer


Alignment
FSK Frame Calculator
OFDM Frame Calculator
Subscriber Configuration
Link Status
Remote Spectrum Analyzer
Sessions
DNS Test
Logs NAT Table
SM Session
SM Authentication
SM Authorization
PPPoE Session Log
EAP Radius Log
User Authentication and
Accounts Access Tracking
Change User Password
Add User
Delete User
PDA Quick Status
Spectrum Results (PDA)
Information
AP Evaluation
AIM
Copyright Copyright Notices
Logoff

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-85


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Security Banner for AP and SM


The security banner has been introduced for all users to accept and acknowledge the security
requirement before login into web interface. By default, the Security Banner feature is disabled
and it can be enabled in configuration > security page.
Once the security banner is enabled, the home login screen will be shown as below:

Figure 31 Login page - Security Banner

The user must accept “I have read, understood and accept the above notice(s)” to proceed
with login. The login button will not be enabled until user accepts notice message.

The user is not allowed to save changes with empty Security Banner Notice if the Security
Banner is enabled. The user will be given a prompt stating “Security Banner Cannot be
empty”.

Filtering protocols and ports


You can filter (block) specified protocols and ports from leaving the AP and SM and entering
the network. This protects the network from both intended and inadvertent packet loading
or probing by network users. By keeping the specified protocols or ports off the network,
this feature also provides a level of protection to users from each other.
Protocol and port filtering is set per AP/SM. Except for filtering of SNMP ports, filtering
occurs as packets leave the AP/SM. If SM is configured to filter SNMP, then SNMP packets
are blocked from entering the SM and, thereby, from interacting with the SNMP portion of
the protocol stack on the SM.

2-86 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Port Filtering with NAT Enabled


Where NAT is enabled on the SM, you can filter only the three user-defined ports. The
following are examples for situations where you can configure port filtering where NAT is
enabled:
 To block a subscriber from using FTP, you can filter Ports 20 and 21 (the FTP ports) for
both the TCP and UDP protocols.
 To block a subscriber from access to SNMP, you can filter Ports 161 and 162 (the SNMP
ports) for both the TCP and UDP protocols.

In only the SNMP case, filtering occurs before the packet interacts with the protocol
stack.

Protocol and Port Filtering with NAT Disabled


Where NAT is disabled on the SM, you can filter both protocols and the three user-defined
ports. Using the check boxes on the interface, you can either:
 Allow all protocols except those that you wish to block.
 Block all protocols except those that you wish to allow.
You can allow or block any of the following protocols:
 PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet)
 Any or all of the following IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) protocols:
 Any or all of the following IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) protocols:
o SMB (Network Neighborhood)
o SNMP
o Bootp Client
o Bootp Server
o Up to 3 user-defined ports
o All other IPv4 traffic (see Figure 32)
 Any or all of the following IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6) protocols:
o SMB (Network Neighborhood)
o SNMP
o Bootp Client
o Bootp Server
o Up to 3 user-defined ports
o All other IPv6 traffic (see Figure 32)
 Filter Direction – Upstream and Downstream
 ARP (Address Resolution Protocol)

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-87


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 32 Categorical protocol filtering

BootP BootP
Client Server

IPv4
SNMP Multica
st
All
Other
IPv4
User
Defined SMB
Port 1

User User
Defined Defined
Port 2 Port 3

PPPoE ARP
All
Others

The following are example situations in which you can configure protocol filtering where
NAT is disabled:
 If you block a subscriber from only PPPoE and SNMP, then the subscriber retains access
to all other protocols and all ports.
 If you block PPPoE, IPv4, and Uplink Broadcast, and you also check the
All others selection, then only Address Resolution Protocol is not filtered.

2-88 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

The ports filtered as a result of protocol selections in the Protocol Filtering tab of the SM
are listed in Table 60.
Table 60 Ports filtered per protocol selections

Protocol Selected Port Filtered (Blocked)

Destination Ports UDP : 137, 138, 139, 445, 3702 and


1900
SMB
Destination Ports TCP : 137, 138, 139, 445, 2869,
5357 and 5358

SNMP Destination Ports TCP and UDP : 161 and 162

Bootp Client Source Port 68 UDP

Bootp Server Source Port 67 UDP

User Defined Port


User defined ports for filtering UDP and TCP
1..3

IPv4 Multicast Block IPv4 packet types except other filters defined.

IPv6 Multicast Block IPv6 packet types except other filters defined.

ARP Filter all Ethernet packet type 806

Applies packet filtering to traffic coming into the FEC


Upstream
interface

Applies packet filtering to traffic destined to exit the


Downstream
FEC interface

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-89


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Port Configuration
Cambium devices support access to various communication protocols and only the ports
required for these protocols are available for access by external entities. Operators may
change the port numbers for these protocols via the radio GUI or SNMP.
Table 61 Device default port numbers

Port Usage Port Usage Device


21 FTP Listen Port AP, SM
80 HTTP Listen Port AP, SM
443 HTTPs Listen Port AP, SM
161 SNMP port Listen Port AP, SM
162 SNMP trap port Destination Port AP, SM
514 Syslog Server port Destination Port AP, SM
1812 Standard RADIUS port Destination Port AP
1813 Standard RADIUS Destination Port AP, SM
accounting port

Isolating SMs
In an AP, you can prevent SMs in the sector from directly communicating with each other.
In CMMmicro Release 2.2 or later and the CMM4, you can prevent connected APs from
directly communicating with each other, which prevents SMs that are in different sectors of
a cluster from communicating with each other.
In the AP, the SM Isolation parameter is available in the General tab of the Configuration
web page. In the drop-down menu for that parameter, you can configure the SM Isolation
feature by any of the following selections:
 Disable SM Isolation (the default selection). This allows full communication between
SMs.
 Enable Option 1 - Block SM destined packets from being forwarded. This prevents
both multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication.
 Enable Option 2 - Forward SM destined packets upstream. This not only prevents
multicast/broadcast and unicast SM-to-SM communication but also sends the packets,
which otherwise may have been handled SM to SM, through the Ethernet port of the AP.
In the CMMmicro and the CMM4, SM isolation treatment is the result of how you choose to
manage the port-based VLAN feature of the embedded switch, where you can switch all
traffic from any AP to an uplink port that you specify. However, this is not packet level
switching. It is not based on VLAN IDs. See the VLAN Port Configuration parameter in
the dedicated user guide that supports the CMM product that you are deploying.

2-90 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Filtering management through Ethernet


You can configure the SM to disallow any device that is connected to its Ethernet port from
accessing the IP address of the SM. If you set the Ethernet Access Control parameter to
Enabled, then:
 No attempt to access the SM management interface (by http, SNMP, ftp, or tftp) through
Ethernet can succeed.
 Any attempt to access the SM management interface over the air (by IP address,
presuming that LAN1 Network Interface Configuration, Network Accessibility is
set to Public, or by link from the Session Status or Remote Subscribers tab in the AP) is
unaffected.

Allowing management from only specified IP addresses


The Security tab of the Configuration web page in the AP and SM includes the IP Access
Control parameter. You can specify one, two, or three IP addresses that must be allowed to
access the management interface (by HTTP, SNMP, FTP or TFTP).
If you select
 IP Access Filtering Disabled, then management access is allowed from any IP
address, even if the Allowed Source IP 1 to 3 parameters are populated.
 IP Access Filtering Enabled, and specify at least one address in the Allowed Source
IP 1 to 3 parameter, then management access is limited to the specified address(es).

Configuring management IP by DHCP


The IP tab in the Configuration web page of every radio contains a LAN1 Network
Interface Configuration, DHCP State parameter that, if enabled, causes the IP
configuration (IP address, subnet mask, and gateway IP address) to be obtained through
DHCP instead of the values of those individual parameters. The setting of this DHCP state
parameter is also viewable, but is not settable, in the Network Interface tab of the Home
page.
In the SM, this parameter is settable
 in the NAT tab of the Configuration web page, but only if NAT is enabled.
 in the IP tab of the Configuration web page, but only if the Network Accessibility
parameter in the IP tab is set to Public.

Planning for airlink security


Cambium’s fixed wireless broadband IP systems employ the following form of encryption for
security of the wireless link:
 DES (Data Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that uses
secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit permutations,
substitutions, and recombination operations on blocks of data. DES encryption does not
affect the performance or throughput of the system.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-91


PMP 450 Planning Guide

 AES (Advanced Encryption Standard): An over-the-air link encryption option that


uses the Rijndael algorithm and 128-bit keys to establish a higher level of security than
DES. AES products are certified as compliant with the Federal Information Processing
Standards (FIPS 197) in the U.S.A.

If an AP is set to "None" SMs that register to this AP will have either "DES" or "AES" listed
in the FPGA Column of the Sessions Status page of the AP if their Encryption Setting is set
to DES or AES.

Planning for RF Telnet Access Control


The RF Telnet Access feature restricts Telnet access to the AP from a device situated below
a network SM (downstream from the AP). This is a security enhancement to restrict RF-
interface sourced AP access specifically to the LAN1 IP address and LAN2 IP address (Radio
Private Address, typically 192.168.101.[LUID]). This restriction disallows unauthorized
users from running Telnet commands on the AP that can change AP configuration or
modifying network-critical components such as routing and ARP tables.

Forwarding Downlink PPPoE PADI packets


The AP supports the control of forwarding of PPPoE PADI (PPPoE Active Discovery
Initiation) packets. This forwarding is configured on the AP GUI Configuration, Radio tab
by parameter PPPoE PADI Downlink Forwarding. When set to “Enabled”, the AP allows
downstream and upstream transmission of PPPoE PADI packets. When set to “Disabled”,
the AP does NOT allow PPPoE PADI packets to be sent out of the AP RF interface
(downstream) but will allow PPPoE PADI packets to enter the RF interface (upstream) and
exit the Ethernet interface.

Planning for RADIUS integration


PMP 450 modules include support for the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User
Service) protocol supporting Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA).

RADIUS Functions
RADIUS protocol support provides the following functions:
 SM Authentication allows only known SMs onto the network (blocking “rogue” SMs),
and can be configured to ensure SMs are connecting to a known network (preventing
SMs from connecting to “rogue” APs). RADIUS authentication is used for SMs, but is
not used for APs. Cambium modules support EAP-TTLS and EAP-MSCHAPv2
authentication methods.
 SM Configuration: Configures authenticated SMs with MIR (Maximum Information
Rate), CIR (Committed Information Rate), High Priority, and VLAN (Virtual LAN)
parameters from the RADIUS server when a SM registers to an AP.

2-92 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

 SM Accounting provides support for RADIUS accounting messages for usage-based


billing. This accounting includes indications for subscriber session establishment,
subscriber session disconnection, and bandwidth usage per session for each SM that
connects to the AP.
 Centralized AP and SM user name and password management allows AP and SM
usernames and access levels (Administrator, Installer, Technician) to be centrally
administered in the RADIUS server instead of on each radio and tracks access events
(logon/logoff) for each username on the RADIUS server. This accounting does not track
and report specific configuration actions performed on radios or pull statistics such as
bit counts from the radios. Such functions require an Element Management System
(EMS) such as Cambium Networks Wireless Manager. This accounting is not the ability
to perform accounting functions on the subscriber/end user/customer account.
 Framed IP allows operators to use a RADIUS server to assign management IP
addressing to SM modules (framed IP address).

Planning for SNMP security


The PMP 450 supports SNMP v2c and SNMP v3. Canopy modules provide the following
Configuration web page parameters in the SNMP tab. These govern SNMP access from the
manager to the agent:
 Community String, which specifies the password for security between managers and
the agent.
 Accessing Subnet, which specifies the subnet mask that allows managers to poll the
agents.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-93


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Ordering components
This section describes how to select components for PMP 450 Greenfield network or PMP
450 network migration. It specifies Cambium part numbers for PMP 450 components.

PMP 450 component part numbers


Table 62 PMP 450 components

Part Number Product Description

Sales Models

C024045A001A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point

C024045A003A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, DES only

C024045C001A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps

C024045C002A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps

C024045C003A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps

C024045C004A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped

2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4


C024045C005A Mbps

2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10


C024045C006A Mbps

2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20


C024045C007A Mbps

2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module,


C024045C008A Uncapped

C035045A001A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point

C035045A003A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, DES only

C035045C001A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps

C035045C002A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps

C035045C003A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps

C035045C004A 3.5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped

3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4


C035045C005A Mbps

3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10


C035045C006A Mbps

2-94 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20


C035045C007A Mbps

3.5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module,


C035045C008A Uncapped

C036045A001A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point

C036045A003A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, DES only

C036045C001A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps

C036045C002A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps

C036045C003A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps

C036045C004A 3.6 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped

3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4


C036045C005A Mbps

3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10


C036045C006A Mbps

3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20


C036045C007A Mbps

3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module,


C036045C008A Uncapped

C054045A001A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point

C054045A002A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, US only

C054045A003A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point, DES only

C054045C001A 5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps

C054045C002A 5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps

C054045C003A 5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps

C054045C004A 5 GHz PMP 450 Subscriber Module, Uncapped

5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4


C054045C005A Mbps

5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10


C054045C006A Mbps

5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20


C054045C007A Mbps

5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module,


C054045C008A Uncapped

C054045C001B 5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, 4 Mbps

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-95


PMP 450 Planning Guide

C054045C002B 5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, 10 Mbps

C054045C003B 5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps

C054045C004B 5 GHz PMP 450 Integrated Subscriber Module, Uncapped

5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 4


C054045C005B
Mbps

6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 10


C054045C006B
Mbps

7 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module, 20


C054045C007B
Mbps

8 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Subscriber Module,


C054045C008B
Uncapped

5 GHz PMP 450d Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps – PMP


C054045C013B 450d Radio Only

5 GHz PMP 450d Subscriber Module, Uncapped – PMP


C054045C014B 450d Radio Only

5 GHz PMP 450d Subscriber Module, 20 Mbps – PMP


C054045H013B 450d

5 GHz PMP 450d Subscriber Module, Uncapped – PMP


C054045H014B 450d

AP Lite

C024045A011A 2.4 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite

C035045A011A 3.3-3.6 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite

C036045A011A 3.55-3.8 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite

C054045A011A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point - Lite

C054045A012A 5 GHz PMP 450 Connectorized Access Point (FCC) - Lite

AP Antenna Options

5 GHz Horizontal and Vertical Polarization Antenna for 90


85009324001 Degree Sector

5 GHz Horizontal and Vertical Polarization Antenna for 60


85009325001 Degree Sector

C024045D601A 2.4 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60 Degree Sector

2-96 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

C030045D901A 3 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90 Degree Sector

30009406002 N-type to N-type cable (16 inch length)

AP Optional Equipment

N000900L001A Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply - 30VDC, 15W

N000900L007A Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, US

N000900L008A Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, EU

N000900L009A Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, UK

ACPS120WA POWER SUPPLY, 120W 30VDC AT 60C 100-240VAC EL5

N000900L001A POWER SUPPLY, 30V, 1000BaseT, 100-240VAC/50-60HZ

600SSH SURGE PROTECTOR

1070CKHH CMM MICRO (OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE)

1090CKHH CMM4 W/RUGGEDIZED SWITCH AND GPS

1091HH CMM4 NO SWITCH

1092HH CMM4 RACK MOUNT ASSEMBLY

1096H UNIVERSAL GPS MODULE

SM Optional Equipment

N000900L001A Gigabit Enet Capable Power Supply - 30VDC, 15W

N000900L007A Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, US

N000900L008A Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, EU

N000900L009A Cable, UL Power Supply Cord Set, UK

C050000D001A 5 GHz CLIP (Cassegrain Lens for Improved Performance)

HK2022A 53CM OFFSET, REFLECTOR DISH KIT,4PK

SMMB1A UNIVERSAL MOUNTING KIT

600SSH SURGE PROTECTOR

Upgrade Keys

C000045K002A PMP 450 4 TO 10 MBPS UPGRADE KEY

C000045K003A PMP 450 4 TO 20 MBPS UPGRADE KEY

C000045K004A PMP 450 4 TO Uncapped UPGRADE KEY

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 2-97


PMP 450 Planning Guide

C000045K005A PMP 450 10 TO 20 MBPS UPGRADE KEY

C000045K006A PMP 450 10 TO Uncapped MBPS UPGRADE KEY

C000045K007A PMP 450 20 TO Uncapped MBPS UPGRADE KEY

C000045K008A PMP 450 Lite AP to Full AP Upgrade Key

Extended Warranty

SG00TS4009A PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year

SG00TS4017A PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years

SG00TS4025A PMP450 AP Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years

SG00TS4010A PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 1 Additional Year

SG00TS4018A PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 2 Additional Years

SG00TS4026A PMP450 SM Extended Warranty, 4 Additional Years

2-98 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Chapter 3: Legal information


This chapter provides legal notices including software license agreements.

Intentional or unintentional changes or modifications to the equipment must not be made


unless under the express consent of the party responsible for compliance. Any such
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and will void the
manufacturer’s warranty.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
 Cambium Networks end user license agreement on page 3-2
 Hardware warranty on page 3-10
 Limit of liability on page 3-11
PMP 450 Planning Guide

Cambium Networks end user license agreement


Acceptance of this agreement
In connection with Cambium’s delivery of certain proprietary software or products
containing embedded or pre-loaded proprietary software, or both, Cambium is willing to
license this certain proprietary software and the accompanying documentation to you only
on the condition that you accept all the terms in this End User License Agreement
(“Agreement”).
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT USE THE
PRODUCT OR INSTALL THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, YOU MAY, FOR A FULL REFUND,
RETURN THIS PRODUCT TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU ACQUIRED IT OR PROVIDE
WRITTEN VERIFICATION OF DELETION OF ALL COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE
OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE PRODUCT, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR ACCEPTANCE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT.

Definitions
In this Agreement, the word “Software” refers to the set of instructions for computers, in
executable form and in any media, (which may include diskette, CD-ROM, downloadable
internet, hardware, or firmware) licensed to you. The word “Documentation” refers to
electronic or printed manuals and accompanying instructional aids licensed to you. The
word “Product” refers to Cambium’s fixed wireless broadband devices for which the
Software and Documentation is licensed for use.

Grant of license
Cambium Networks Limited (“Cambium”) grants you (“Licensee” or “you”) a personal,
nonexclusive, non-transferable license to use the Software and Documentation subject to
the Conditions of Use set forth in “Conditions of use” and the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any terms or conditions relating to the Software and Documentation appearing
on the face or reverse side of any purchase order, purchase order acknowledgment or other
order document that are different from, or in addition to, the terms of this Agreement will
not be binding on the parties, even if payment is accepted.

Conditions of use
Any use of the Software and Documentation outside of the conditions set forth in this
Agreement is strictly prohibited and will be deemed a breach of this Agreement.
1. Only you, your employees or agents may use the Software and Documentation. You will
take all necessary steps to insure that your employees and agents abide by the terms of this
Agreement.

3-2 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

2. You will use the Software and Documentation (i) only for your internal business purposes;
(ii) only as described in the Software and Documentation; and (iii) in strict accordance with
this Agreement.
3. You may use the Software and Documentation, provided that the use is in conformance
with the terms set forth in this Agreement.
4. Portions of the Software and Documentation are protected by United States copyright
laws, international treaty provisions, and other applicable laws. Therefore, you must treat
the Software like any other copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording)
except that you may either: (i) make 1 copy of the transportable part of the Software (which
typically is supplied on diskette, CD-ROM, or downloadable internet), solely for back-up
purposes; or (ii) copy the transportable part of the Software to a PC hard disk, provided you
keep the original solely for back-up purposes. If the Documentation is in printed form, it
may not be copied. If the Documentation is in electronic form, you may print out 1 copy,
which then may not be copied. With regard to the copy made for backup or archival
purposes, you agree to reproduce any Cambium copyright notice, and other proprietary
legends appearing thereon. Such copyright notice(s) may appear in any of several forms,
including machine-readable form, and you agree to reproduce such notice in each form in
which it appears, to the extent it is physically possible to do so. Unauthorized duplication of
the Software or Documentation constitutes copyright infringement, and in the United States
is punishable in federal court by fine and imprisonment.
5. You will not transfer, directly or indirectly, any product, technical data or software to any
country for which the United States Government requires an export license or other
governmental approval without first obtaining such license or approval.

Title and restrictions


If you transfer possession of any copy of the Software and Documentation to another
party outside of the terms of this agreement, your license is automatically terminated. Title
and copyrights to the Software and Documentation and any copies made by you remain with
Cambium and its licensors. You will not, and will not permit others to: (i) modify, translate,
decompile, bootleg, reverse engineer, disassemble, or extract the inner workings of the
Software or Documentation, (ii) copy the look-and-feel or functionality of the Software or
Documentation; (iii) remove any proprietary notices, marks, labels, or logos from the
Software or Documentation; (iv) rent or transfer all or some of the Software or
Documentation to any other party without Cambium’s prior written consent; or (v) utilize
any computer software or hardware which is designed to defeat any copy protection device,
should the Software and Documentation be equipped with such a protection device. If the
Software and Documentation is provided on multiple types of media (such as diskette, CD-
ROM, downloadable internet), then you will only use the medium which best meets your
specific needs, and will not loan, rent, lease, or transfer the other media contained in the
package without Cambium’s written consent. Unauthorized copying of the Software or
Documentation, or failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Agreement, will result
in automatic termination of this license.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 3-3


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Confidentiality
You acknowledge that all Software and Documentation contain valuable proprietary
information and trade secrets and that unauthorized or improper use of the Software and
Documentation will result in irreparable harm to Cambium for which monetary damages
would be inadequate and for which Cambium will be entitled to immediate injunctive relief.
If applicable, you will limit access to the Software and Documentation to those of your
employees and agents who need to use the Software and Documentation for your internal
business purposes, and you will take appropriate action with those employees and agents to
preserve the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation, using the same degree of
care to avoid unauthorized or improper disclosure as you use for the protection of your own
proprietary software, but in no event less than reasonable care.
You have no obligation to preserve the confidentiality of any proprietary information that: (i)
was in the public domain at the time of disclosure; (ii) entered the public domain through no
fault of yours; (iii) was given to you free of any obligation to keep it confidential; (iv) is
independently developed by you; or (v) is disclosed as required by law provided that you
notify Cambium prior to such disclosure and provide Cambium with a reasonable
opportunity to respond.

Right to use Cambium’s name


Except as required in “Conditions of use”, you will not, during the term of this
Agreement or thereafter, use any trademark of Cambium, or any word or symbol likely to be
confused with any Cambium trademark, either alone or in any combination with another
word or words.

Transfer
The Software and Documentation may not be transferred to another party without the
express written consent of Cambium, regardless of whether or not such transfer is
accomplished by physical or electronic means. Cambium’s consent may be withheld at its
discretion and may be conditioned upon transferee paying all applicable license fees and
agreeing to be bound by this Agreement.

Updates
During the first 12 months after purchase of a Product, or during the term of any
executed Maintenance and Support Agreement for the Product, you are entitled to receive
Updates. An “Update” means any code in any form which is a bug fix, patch, error
correction, or minor enhancement, but excludes any major feature added to the Software.
Updates are available for download at the support website.

3-4 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Major features may be available from time to time for an additional license fee. If Cambium
makes available to you major features and no other end user license agreement is provided,
then the terms of this Agreement will apply.

Maintenance
Except as provided above, Cambium is not responsible for maintenance or field service
of the Software under this Agreement.

Disclaimer
CAMBIUM DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED, STATUTORY, OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU. CAMBIUM
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILTY, NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” CAMBIUM DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT THE
OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE, OR THAT
DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECTED. CAMBIUM MAKES NO WARRANTY
WITH RESPECT TO THE CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF THE
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of
implied warranties, so the above exclusion may not apply to you.

Limitation of liability
THE TOTAL LIABILITY OF CAMBIUM UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR DAMAGES
WILL NOT EXCEED THE TOTAL AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT LICENSED
UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL CAMBIUM BE LIABLE IN ANY WAY FOR
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY
NATURE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST BUSINESS PROFITS, OR LIABILITY
OR INJURY TO THIRD PERSONS, WHETHER FORESEEABLE OR NOT, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER CAMBIUM HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBLITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some jurisdictions do not permit limitations of liability for incidental or consequential
damages, so the above exclusions may not apply to you.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 3-5


PMP 450 Planning Guide

U.S. government
If you are acquiring the Product on behalf of any unit or agency of the U.S. Government,
the following applies. Use, duplication, or disclosure of the Software and Documentation is
subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of the Commercial
Computer Software – Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227-19 (JUNE 1987), if applicable,
unless being provided to the Department of Defense. If being provided to the Department of
Defense, use, duplication, or disclosure of the Products is subject to the restricted rights set
forth in subparagraph (c) (1) (ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software
clause at DFARS 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), if applicable. Software and Documentation may
or may not include a Restricted Rights notice, or other notice referring specifically to the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. The terms and conditions of this Agreement will
each continue to apply, but only to the extent that such terms and conditions are not
inconsistent with the rights provided to you under the aforementioned provisions of the FAR
and DFARS, as applicable to the particular procuring agency and procurement transaction.

Term of license
Your right to use the Software will continue in perpetuity unless terminated as follows.
Your right to use the Software will terminate immediately without notice upon a breach of
this Agreement by you. Within 30 days after termination of this Agreement, you will certify
to Cambium in writing that through your best efforts, and to the best of your knowledge, the
original and all copies, in whole or in part, in any form, of the Software and all related
material and Documentation, have been destroyed, except that, with prior written consent
from Cambium, you may retain one copy for archival or backup purposes. You may not
sublicense, assign or transfer the license or the Product, except as expressly provided in
this Agreement. Any attempt to otherwise sublicense, assign or transfer any of the rights,
duties or obligations hereunder is null and void.

Governing law
This Agreement is governed by the laws of the United States of America to the extent that
they apply and otherwise by the laws of the State of Illinois.

Assignment
This agreement may not be assigned by you without Cambium’s prior written consent.

3-6 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Survival of provisions
The parties agree that where the context of any provision indicates an intent that it survives
the term of this Agreement, then it will survive.

Entire agreement
This agreement contains the parties’ entire agreement regarding your use of the
Software and may be amended only in writing signed by both parties, except that Cambium
may modify this Agreement as necessary to comply with applicable laws.

Third party software


The software may contain one or more items of Third-Party Software supplied by other
third-party suppliers. The terms of this Agreement govern your use of any Third-Party
Software UNLESS A SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE LICENSE IS INCLUDED, IN
WHICH CASE YOUR USE OF THE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE WILL THEN BE GOVERNED
BY THE SEPARATE THIRD-PARTY LICENSE.

ZLIB Copyright Notice


Copyright © 1995-1998 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will
the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the
product documentation may be appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented
as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly
[email protected]
Mark Adler
[email protected]

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 3-7


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Modernizr Copyright Notice


MIT License
Copyright © 2009-2010 Faruk Ates
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software
and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright
notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the
Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
BSD License
Copyright © 2010, Faruk Ates All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the Organization nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

3-8 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

D3 Copyright Notice
Copyright (c) 2013, Michael Bostock All rights reserved.
 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
 The name Michael Bostock may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MICHAEL BOSTOCK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 3-9


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Hardware warranty

Cambium’s standard hardware warranty is for one (1) year from date of shipment from
Cambium or a Cambium Point-To-Point Distributor. Cambium warrants that hardware will
conform to the relevant published specifications and will be free from material defects in
material and workmanship under normal use and service. Cambium shall within this time, at
its own option, either repair or replace the defective product within thirty (30) days of
receipt of the defective product. Repaired or replaced product will be subject to the original
warranty period but not less than thirty (30) days.

3-10 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Limit of liability

IN NO EVENT SHALL CAMBIUM NETWORKS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PARTY


FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
EXEMPLARY OR OTHER DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCT (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION OR ANY
OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS, OR FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY, EVEN IF CAMBIUM
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. (Some states do not allow
the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above exclusion or
limitation may not apply to you.) IN NO CASE SHALL CAMBIUM’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE
AMOUNT YOU PAID FOR THE PRODUCT.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 3-11


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Chapter 4: Reference information


This chapter contains reference information and regulatory notices that apply to the
PMP 450 Series products.
The following topics are described in this chapter:
 Equipment specifications on page 4-2 shows the specifications of the AP, SM and other
equipment required for PMP 450 installations.
 Wireless specifications on page 4-11 contains specifications of the PMP 450 wireless
interface, including RF bands, channel width and link loss.
 Data network specifications on page 4-12 shows the PMP 450 Ethernet interface
specifications.
 Compliance with safety standards on page 4-13 lists the safety specifications against
which the PMP 450 has been tested and certified. It also describes how to keep RF
exposure within safe limits.
 Compliance with radio regulations on page 4-19 describes how the PMP 450 complies
with the radio regulations that are enforced in various countries.
 Notifications on page 4-49 shows the notifications made to regulatory bodies for the
PMP 450.
PMP 450 Planning Guide

Equipment specifications
This section contains specifications of the AP, SM, associated supplies required for PMP
450 installations.

AP specifications
The PMP 450 AP conforms to the specifications listed in Table 63. These specifications
apply to all PMP 450 product variants (except where noted).
Table 63 AP physical specifications

Category Specification

Product

Model Number 2.4 GHz C024045A001A, C024045A003A, C024045A011A

3.5 GHz C035045A001A, C035045A003A, C035045A011A

3.6 GHz C036045A001A, C036045A003A, C036045A011A

5 GHz C054045A001A, C054045A002A, C054045A003A,


C054045A011A, C054045A012A

Spectrum

Channel 5 MHz Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz)


Spacing 7 MHz Configurable on 1 kHz increments (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz)
10 MHz 7 MHz Channel bandwidth configurable for 3.5 GHz
20 MHz and 3.6 GHz band only.
channel
bandwidth

Frequency 2.4 GHz 2400 – 2483.5 MHz


Range
3.5 GHz 3300 – 3600 MHz (dependent upon Region Code
setting)

3.6 GHz 3550 – 3800 MHz (dependent upon Region Code


setting)

5 GHz 5470 – 5875 MHz (dependent upon Region Code


setting)

Channel Width 5 MHz (2.4 GHz, 3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz and 5.8 GHz only),
7 MHz (3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz)
10 MHz or 20 MHz

OFDM Subcarriers 512 FFT

4-2 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Category Specification

Interface

MAC (Media Access Cambium Proprietary


Control) Layer

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 10/100BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated


(802.3 compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3 HTTP,
HTTPS, FTP, TFTP, RADIUS

Network Management HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, SNMP v2c, SNMP v3, Syslog,
TFTP

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-inQ), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,


dynamic port VID

Performance

Nominal 2.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -91 dBm, 2x = -91 dBm, 4x = -85 dBm, 6x
Receive = -78 dBm, 8x = -70 dBm
Sensitivity (w/
3.5 GHz OFDM: 1x = -92 dBm, 2x = -92 dBm, 4x = -86 dBm, 6x
FEC) @ 5 MHz
= -79 dBm, 8x = -71 dBm
Channel,
Single Branch 3.6 GHz OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x
= -76 dBm, 8x = -68 dBm

5.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -89 dBm, 2x = -89 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x


= -75 dBm, 8x = -66 dBm

5.8 GHz OFDM: 1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm, 6x


= -75 dBm, 8x = -65 dBm

Nominal 3.5 GHz OFDM: 1x = -90 dBm, 2x = -90 dBm, 4x = -83 dBm, 6x
Receive = -77 dBm, 8x = -71 dBm
Sensitivity (w/
FEC) @ 7 MHz 3.6 GHz OFDM: 1x = -89 dBm, 2x = -89 dBm, 4x = -82 dBm, 6x
Channel, = -75 dBm, 8x = -67 dBm
Single Branch

Nominal 2.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm,
Receive 6x = -75 dBm, 8x = -69 dBm
Sensitivity (w/
FEC) @ 10 3.5 GHz OFDM: 1x = -88 dBm, 2x = -88 dBm, 4x = -81 dBm,
MHz Channel, 6x = -76 dBm, 8x = -68 dBm
Single Branch 3.6 GHz OFDM: 1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -80 dBm,
6x = -73 dBm, 8x = -66 dBm

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-3


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Category Specification

5.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -84 dBm, 2x = -84 dBm, 4x = -78 dBm, 6x


= -72 dBm, 8x = -63 dBm

5.8 GHz OFDM: 1x = -84 dBm, 2x = -84 dBm, 4x = -77 dBm, 6x


= -71 dBm, 8x = -63 dBm

Nominal 2.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -85 dBm, 2x = -85 dBm, 4x = -79 dBm, 6x
Receive = -72 dBm, 8x = -66 dBm
Sensitivity (w/
FEC) @ 20 3.5 GHz OFDM: 1x = -85 dBm, 2x = -85 dBm, 4x = -79 dBm, 6x
MHz Channel, = -72 dBm, 8x = -65 dBm
Single Branch 3.6 GHz OFDM: 1x = -86 dBm, 2x = -86 dBm, 4x = -78 dBm, 6x
= -71 dBm, 8x = -63 dBm

5.4 GHz OFDM: 1x = -81 dBm, 2x = -81 dBm, 4x = -75 dBm, 6x


= -68 dBm, 8x = -59 dBm

5.8 GHz OFDM: 1x = -82 dBm, 2x = -82 dBm, 4x = -75 dBm, 6x


= -69 dBm, 8x = -60 dBm

Maximum 2.4 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi)


Deployment
Range 3.5 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi)

3.6 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi)

5 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi)

Subscribers Per Sector Up to 238

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms and 5 ms

Modulation Levels QPSK (MIMO-B and MIMO-A), 16-QAM (MIMO-B and


(Adaptive) MIMO-A), 64-QAM (MIMO-B and MIMO-A), 256-QAM
(MIMO-B and MIMO-A)

Latency 3 - 5 ms for 2.5 ms Frame Period


6 – 10 ms for 5 ms Frame Period

Packets Per Second 12, 500

GPS Synchronization Yes, via CMM3, CMM4, or UGPS

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

4-4 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Category Specification

Combined Transmit Power -30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dB-
configurable intervals (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz)
-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) in 1 dB-
configurable intervals (3.5 GHz)
-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region and channel
bandwidth) in 1 dB-configurable intervals (3.6 GHz)

Antenna Gain 2.4 GHz 18 dBi Dual Slant


(Does not
include cable 3.5 GHz 16 dBi Dual Slant
loss, ~1dB)
3.6 GHz 16 dBi Dual Slant

5 GHz 17 dBi Horizontal and Vertical

Maximum Transmit Power 22 dBm combined OFDM (2.4GHz, 5 GHz) (dependent


(Conducted) upon Region Code setting)
25 dBm combined OFDM (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz),
(dependent upon Region Code setting)

Physical

Wind Loading 2.4 GHz 216 km/hour (135 mi/hour)

3.5 GHz 216 km/hour (135 mi/hour)

3.6 GHz 216 km/hour (135 mi/hour)

5 GHz 190 km/hour (118 mi/hour)

Antenna Connection 50 ohm, N-type

Environmental IP67

Temperature -40ºC to +60ºC (-40ºF to +140ºF)

Weight 2.4 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna


2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

3.5 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna


2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

3.6 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna


2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

5 GHz 5.9 kg (13 lbs) with antenna


2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

Dimensions (H 2.4 GHz Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”)


x W x D) Antenna: 112.2 x 24.5 x 11.7 cm (44.2” x 9.6” x 4.6”)

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-5


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Category Specification

3.5 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna


2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

3.6 GHz 15 kg (33 lbs) with antenna


2.5 kg (5.5 lbs) without antenna

5 GHz Radio: 27 x 21 x 7 cm (10.6” x 8.3” x 2.8”)


Antenna: 51 x 13 x 7.3 cm (20.2” x 5.1” x 2.9”)

Maximum Power 14 W
Consumption

Input Voltage 22 to 32 VDC

Security

Encryption 56-bit DES, AES

Certifications

FCC ID Z8H89FT0002 (5.4, 5.8 GHz)


Z8H89FT0004 (2.4 GHz)
Z8H89FT0010 (3.6 GHz)

Industry Canada Cert 109W-0002 (5.4, 5.8 GHz)


109W-0004 (2.4 GHz)
109W-0008 (3.5 GHz)
109W-0010 (3.6 GHz)

CE EN 301 893 v1.6.1 (5.4 GHz)


EN 302 502 v1.2.1 (5.8 GHz)
ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2 (3.5 GHz)
ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2 (3.6 GHz)

4-6 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

SM specifications
The PMP 450 SM conforms to the specifications listed in Table 64. These specifications
apply to all PMP 450 product variants.
Table 64 SM physical specifications

Category Specification

Product

Model 2.4 GHz C024045C001A, C024045C002A, C024045C003A,


Number C024045C004A, C024045C005A, C024045C006A,
C024045C007A, C024045C008A

3.5 GHz C035045C001A, C035045C002A, C035045C003A,


C035045C004A, C035045C005A, C035045C006A,
C035045C007A, C035045C008A

3.6 GHz C036045C001A, C036045C002A, C036045C003A,


C036045C004A, C036045C005A, C036045C006A,
C036045C007A, C036045C008A

5 GHz C054045C001A, C054045C002A, C054045C003A,


C054045C004A, C054045C005A, C054045C006A,
C054045C007A, C054045C008A, C054045C013B,
C054045C014B, C054045H013B, C054045H014B

Spectrum

Channel 5 MHz Configurable on 2.5 MHz increments (2.4GHz, 5 GHz)


Spacing 7 MHz Configurable on 1 kHz increments (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz)
10MHz 7 MHz Channel bandwidth configurable for 3.5 GHz and
20 MHz 3.6 GHz band only.
channel
bandwidth

Frequency 2.4 GHz 2400 – 2483.5 MHz


Range
3.5 GHz 3300 – 3600 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting)

3.6 GHz 3550 – 3800 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting)

5 GHz 5470 – 5875 MHz (dependent upon Region Code setting)

Channel Width 5 MHz (2.4GHz, 3.5GHz, 3.6GHz and 5.8GHz only), 10


MHz or 20 MHz

OFDM Subcarriers 512 FFT

Interface

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-7


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Category Specification

MAC (Media Access Cambium Proprietary


Control) Layer

Physical Layer 2x2 MIMO OFDM

Ethernet Interface 10/100BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto negotiated


(802.3 compliant)

Protocols Used IPv4, UDP, TCP, IP, ICMP, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3, HTTP,
HTTPS, FTP, TFTP, RADIUS

Network Management HTTP, HTTPS, FTP, TFTP, SNMP v2c, SNMP v3, Syslog

VLAN 802.1ad (DVLAN Q-in-Q), 802.1Q with 802.1p priority,


dynamic port VID

Performance

Maximum 2.4 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi) with reflector dish


Deployment
Range 3.5 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi) with reflector dish

3.6 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi) with reflector dish

5 GHz Up to 64 km (40 mi) with reflector dish

ARQ Yes

Cyclic Prefix 1/16

Frame Period 2.5 ms and 5 ms

Modulation Levels QPSK (MIMO-B and MIMO-A), 16-QAM (MIMO-B and


(Adaptive) MIMO-A), 64-QAM (MIMO-B and MIMO-A), 256-QAM
(MIMO-B and MIMO-A)

Latency 3 - 5 ms

GPS Synchronization Yes

Quality of Service Diffserv QoS

Link Budget

Antenna Beam Width 55º azimuth, 55º elevation (both horizontal and vertical)

Combined Transmit -30 to +22 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) – 2.4 GHz, 5
Power GHz
-30 to +25 dBm (to EIRP limit by region) – 3.5 GHz, 3.6
GHz

4-8 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Category Specification

Antenna 2.4 GHz 7 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch


Gain
3.5 GHz 8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch

3.6 GHz 8 dBi Dual Slant, integrated patch

5 GHz 9 dBi H+V, integrated patch

Maximum Transmit 22 dBm combined (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz) (dependent upon


Power Region Code setting)
25 dBm combined (3.5 GHz, 3.6 GHz) (dependent upon
Region Code setting)

Reflector 2.4 GHz +12 dBi


Gain
3.5 GHz +11 dBi

3.6 GHz +11 dBi

5 GHz +15 dBi

CLIP Gain (5 GHz only) +8 dBi

LENS Gain (5 GHz only) +5.5 dBi

Dish Gain ( 5 GHz only) +17 dBi

Physical

Wind Loading 190 km/hour (118 mi/hour)

Environmental IP55

Temperature -40ºC to +60ºC (-40ºF to +140ºF)

Weight 0.45 kg (1 lb)

Dimensions (H x W x D) 30 x 9 x 9 cm (11.75” x 3.4” x 3.4”)

Maximum Power 12 W
Consumption

Input Voltage 20 - 32 VDC

Security

Encryption 56-bit DES, AES

Certifications

FCC ID Z8H89FT0001 (5.4, 5.8 GHz)


Z8H89FT0003 (2.4 GHz)
Z8H89FT0009 (3.6 GHz)

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-9


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Category Specification

Industry Canada Cert 109W-0001 (5.4, 5.8 GHz)


109W-0003 (2.4 GHz)
109W-0007 (3.5 GHz)
109W-0009 (3.6 GHz)

CE EN 301 893 v1.6.1 (5.4 GHz)


EN 302 502 v1.2.1 (5.8 GHz)
ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2 (3.5 GHz)
ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2 (3.6 GHz)

4-10 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Wireless specifications
This section contains specifications of the PMP 450 wireless interface. These specifications
include RF bands, channel bandwidth, spectrum settings, maximum power and link loss.

General wireless specifications


The wireless specifications that apply to all PMP 450 variants are listed under Table 65.
Table 65 PMP 450 wireless specifications

Item Specification

Channel selection Manual selection (fixed frequency).

Manual power control To avoid interference to other users of the band,


maximum power can be set lower than the default
power limit.

Duplex scheme Adaptive TDD

Range 2.4 GHz 40 mi / 64 km

3.5 GHz 40 mi / 64 km

3.6 GHz 40 mi / 64 km

5 GHz 40 mi / 64 km

Over-the-air encryption DES, AES

Error Correction Rate 3/4 RS coder

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-11


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Data network specifications


This section contains specifications of the PMP 450 Ethernet interface.

Ethernet interface
The PMP 450 Ethernet port conforms to the specifications listed in Table 66.
Table 66 PMP 450 Ethernet bridging specifications

Ethernet Bridging Specification

Protocol IEEE 802.3 compatible

QoS IEEE 802.1p, IEEE 802.1Q, IEEE 802.1ad,


DSCP IPv4

Interface 1000 BaseT, half/full duplex, rate auto


negotiated

Maximum Ethernet Frame 1700 Bytes


Size

Practical Ethernet rates depend on network configuration, higher layer protocols and
platforms used.
Over the air throughput is restricted to the rate of the Ethernet interface at the receiving
end of the link.

4-12 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Compliance with safety standards


This section lists the safety specifications against which the PMP 450 has been tested and
certified. It also describes how to keep RF exposure within safe limits.

Electrical safety compliance


The PMP 450 hardware has been tested for compliance to the electrical safety
specifications listed in Table 67.
Table 67 PMP 450 safety compliance specifications

Region Specification

USA UL 60950

Canada CSA C22.2 No.60950

Internation CB certified & certificate to IEC


al 60950

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) compliance


The EMC specification type approvals that have been granted for PMP 450 are listed under
Table 68.
Table 68 EMC emissions compliance

Variant Region Specification (Type Approvals)

PMP 450 USA FCC Part 15 Class B

Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210

International EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2


EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-13


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Human exposure to radio frequency energy


Standards
Relevant standards (USA and EC) applicable when working with RF equipment are:
 ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human
Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz.
 Council recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of the general
public to electromagnetic fields (0 Hz to 300 GHz) (1999/519/EC) and respective
national regulations.
 Directive 2004/40/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 29 April 2004
on the minimum health and safety requirements regarding the exposure of workers to
the risks arising from physical agents (electromagnetic fields) (18th individual
Directive within the meaning of Article 16(1) of Directive 89/391/EEC).
 US FCC limits for the general population. See the FCC web site at http://www.fcc.gov,
and the policies, guidelines, and requirements in Part 1 of Title 47 of the Code of
Federal Regulations, as well as the guidelines and suggestions for evaluating
compliance in FCC OET Bulletin 65.
 Health Canada limits for the general population. See the Health Canada web site at
http://www.hc-sc.gc.ca/ewh-semt/pubs/radiation/99ehd-dhm237/limits-limites_e.html
and Safety Code 6.
 EN 50383:2002 Basic standard for the calculation and measurement of
electromagnetic field strength and SAR related to human exposure from radio base
stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems (110 MHz -
40 GHz).
 BS EN 50385:2002 Product standard to demonstrate the compliances of radio base
stations and fixed terminal stations for wireless telecommunication systems with the
basic restrictions or the reference levels related to human exposure to radio frequency
electromagnetic fields (110 MHz – 40 GHz) – general public.
 ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) guidelines for
the general public. See the ICNIRP web site at http://www.icnirp.de/ and Guidelines for
Limiting Exposure to Time-Varying Electric, Magnetic, and Electromagnetic Fields.

Power density exposure limit


Install the radios for the PMP 450 family of PMP wireless solutions so as to provide and
maintain the minimum separation distances from all persons.
The applicable power density exposure limit from the standards (see Human exposure to
radio frequency energy on page 4-14) is:
 10 W/m2 for RF energy in the 2.4, 3.5GHz, 3.6 GHz, 5.4-GHz and 5.8-GHz frequency
bands.

4-14 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Calculation of power density


Peak power density in the far field of a radio frequency point source is calculated as
follows:

P .G
S
4 d 2
Where: Is:
S power density in W/m2
P maximum average transmit power
capability of the radio, in W
G total Tx gain as a factor, converted
from dB
d distance from point source, in m

The calculations are based on the ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991 method, as that provides a
worst case analysis. Details of the assessment to EN50383:2002 can be provided, if
required.
Rearranging terms to solve for distance yields:

P.G
d
4 .S

Calculated distances and power compliance margins


The calculated minimum separation distances, recommended distances and resulting
margins for each frequency band and antenna combination are explained under Table 69.
These are conservative distances that include compliance margins. At these and greater
separation distances, the power density from the RF field is below generally accepted
limits for the general population.
PMP 450 equipment adheres to all applicable EIRP limits for transmit power when
operating in MIMO mode. Separation distances and compliance margins include
compensation for both transmitters.
Explanation of terms used in Table 69:
Tx burst – maximum average transmit power in burst (Watt)
P – maximum average transmit power capability of the radio (Watt) (combined
transmitters)

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-15


PMP 450 Planning Guide

G – total transmit gain as a factor, converted from dB


S – power density (W/m2)
d – minimum distance from point source (meters)
R – recommended distances (meters)
C – compliance factor

4-16 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 69 Power Compliance Margins

Frequency Antenna Variable Recommended Power


Band d Separation Compliance
P G S Distance Margin

5 GHz Integrated SM, 9 0.158 W 7.9 10 W/m2 10 20 cm 40.27


OFDM dBi patch (22 (9 dB) or 1 cm (8 in)
dBm) mW/cm2

Integrated SM, 9 0.158 W 50 (17 10 W/m2 25 50 cm (20 in) 39.7


dBi patch with 8 (22 dB) or 1 cm
dBi CLIP dBm) mW/cm2

Integrated SM, 9 0.158 W 28 (14.5 10 W/m2 18.7 50 cm (20 in) 71.01


dBi patch with 5.5 (22 dB) or 1 cm
dBi LENS dBm) mW/cm2

Integrated SM, 9 0.158 W 199 (23 10 W/m2 50 100 cm (40 40


dBi patch with 16 (22 dB) or 1 cm in)
dBi Reflector Dish dBm) mW/cm2

2.4 GHz Integrated SM, 8 0.158 W 6.3 10 W/m2 8.9 20 cm (8 in) 50.5
OFDM dBi patch (22 (8 dB) or 1 cm
dBm) mW/cm2

Integrated SM, 8 0.158 W 100 (20 10 W/m2 35 100 cm (40 79.5


dBi patch with 12 (22 dB) or 1 cm in)
dBi Reflector Dish dBm) mW/cm2

3.5 GHz Integrated SM, 8 0.316 W 6.3 10 W/m2 12.5 50 cm (8 in) 160
OFDM dBi patch (25 (8 dB) or 1 cm
dBm) mW/cm2

Integrated SM, 8 0.316 W 79.4 (19 10 W/m2 44.6 100 cm (40 50.2
dBi patch with 11 (25 dB) or 1 cm in)
dBi Reflector Dish dBm) mW/cm2

3.6 GHz Integrated SM, 8 0.316 W 6.3 10 W/m2 12.5 50 cm (8 in) 160
OFDM dBi patch (25 (8 dB) or 1 cm
dBm) mW/cm2

Integrated SM, 8 0.316 W 79.4 (19 10 W/m2 44.6 100 cm (40 50.2
dBi patch with 11 (25 dB) or 1 cm in)
dBi Reflector Dish dBm) mW/cm2

Connectorized 0.316 W 158.5 10 W/m2 63.1 130 cm (51 25.1


SM, with 22 dBi (19 (22 dB) or 1 cm in)
panel dBm) mW/cm2

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-17


PMP 450 Planning Guide

2.4, 5 Connectorized AP, 0.158 W 50 10 W/m2 25.1 50 cm (20 in) 39.8


GHz with 17 dBi Sector (22 (17 dB) or 1 cm
OFDM Antenna dBm) mW/cm2

3.5, 3.6 Connectorized AP, 0.316 W 50 10 W/m2 35.4 100 cm (40 79.7
GHz with 17 dBi Sector (25 (17 dB) or 1 cm in)
OFDM Antenna dBm) mW/cm2

Gain of antenna in dBi = 10*log(G).


The regulations require that the power used for the calculations is the maximum power in
the transmit burst subject to allowance for source-based time-averaging.
If there are no EIRP limits in the country of deployment, use the distance calculations for
FCC 5.8 GHz for all frequency bands.

4-18 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Compliance with radio regulations


This section describes how the PMP 450 complies with the radio regulations that are
enforced in various countries.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Cambium could void the user’s
authority to operate the system.

Type approvals
This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means
that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to
comply. The frequency bands in which the system operates may be ‘unlicensed’ and, in
these bands, the system can be used provided it does not cause interference. The system is
not guaranteed protection against interference from other products and installations.
The radio specification type approvals that have been granted for PMP 450 frequency
variants are listed under Table 70.
Table 70 Radio certifications

Variant Region Specification (Type Approvals)

2.4 GHz PMP Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210


450
USA FCC Part 15 Class B

3.5 GHz PMP Canada RSS Gen and RSS 192


450
Europe ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2

3.6 GHz PMP Canada RSS Gen and RSS 192


450
Europe ETSI EN 302 326-2 V1.2.2

USA FCC Part 15 Class B

5.4 GHz PMP Europe ETSI EN 301 893 v1.6.1


450
USA FCC Part 15 Class B

5.8 GHz PMP Canada RSS Gen and RSS 210


450
USA FCC Part 15 Class B

Europe ETSI EN 302 502 v1.2.1

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-19


PMP 450 Planning Guide

DFS for 5.4 GHz Radios


Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) is a requirement in several countries and regions for 5
GHz unlicensed systems to detect radar systems and avoid co-channel operation. DFS and
other regulatory requirements drive the settings for the following parameters, as
discussed in this section:
 Country Code
 Primary Frequency
 Alternate 1 and Alternate 2 Frequencies
 External Antenna Gain
On the AP, Home => DFS Status page shows current DFS status of all three frequencies
and a DFS log of past DFS events.
Figure 33 AP DFS Status

Background and Operation


The modules use region-specific DFS based on the Country Code selected on the
module’s Configuration, General page. By directing installers and technicians to set the
Country Code correctly, the operator gains confidence the module is operating according
to national or regional regulations without having to deal with the details for each region.
Some regions have requirements to avoid certain 5.4 GHz frequencies used by some
weather radar. To meet this requirement, modules set to Europe will display the certain
channel frequencies shown in Table 73 page 4-23 on the AP’s Carrier Frequency pop-up
and on the SM’s Frequency Scan Selection List.
The details of DFS operation and channels available for each Country Code, including
whether DFS is active on the AP, SM, which DFS regulation apply, and any channel
restrictions are shown in Table 71 on page 4-21. DFS does not apply to 4.9 GHz.

4-20 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 71 OFDM DFS operation based on Country Code setting

Weather
Region Country Radar
Band AP SM
Code Code Notch-
Out

5.4 ETSI EN 301 893 ETSI EN 301 893


Vietnam
GHz v1.6.1 DFS v1.6.1 DFS
Asia India, No
5.8
Vietnam, No effect No effect
GHz
Indonesia

5.4
Africa Algeria No effect No effect No
GHz

5.4 ETSI EN 301 893 ETSI EN 301 893


No
GHz v1.6.1 DFS v1.6.1 DFS
Oceania Australia
5.8
No effect No effect No
GHz

Denmark, 5.4 ETSI EN 301 893 ETSI EN 301 893


Yes
Finland, GHz v1.6.1 DFS v1.6.1 DFS
Germany,
Greece,
Iceland,
Ireland,
Liechtenste
Europe
in, Norway, 5.8 ETSI EN 302 502 ETSI EN 302 502
Portugal, No
GHz v1.2.1 DFS v1.2.1 DFS
Serbia,
Spain,
Switzerland
, United
Kingdom

5.4 ETSI EN 301 893


No effect No
South GHz v1.6.1 DFS
Brazil
America 5.8
No effect No effect No
GHz

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-21


PMP 450 Planning Guide

2.4
No effect No effect No
GHz

5.4
Canada FCC/IC DFS No effect Yes
GHz

5.8
No effect No effect No
North GHz
America 2.4
No effect No effect No
GHz

United 5.4
FCC DFS No effect Yes
States GHz

5.8
No effect No effect No
GHz

2.4
No effect No effect
GHz

5.4
Other-FCC FCC DFS No effect No
Other- GHz
Regulato 5.8
No effect No effect
ry GHz

5.4 ETSI EN 301 893 ETSI EN 301 893


No
GHz v1.6.1 DFS v1.6.1 DFS
Other-ETSI
5.8 ETSI EN 302 502 ETSI EN 302 502
No
GHz v1.2.1 DFS v1.2.1 DFS

Country Codes and available spectrum


The following tables list the Country Codes available on PMP 450 AP and SM units.
Country Code settings affect the radios in the following ways:
 Maximum transmit power limiting (based on radio transmitter power plus
configured antenna gain)
 DFS operation is enabled based on the configured region code, if applicable
PMP 450 equipment shipped to the United States is locked to a Country Code setting of
“United States”. Units shipped to regions other than the United States must be configured
with the corresponding Country Code to comply with local regulatory requirements.

4-22 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 72 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.5 GHz

# of Non-
# of Center overlapping
Range of
Channels center
Band Center Center
Channel (based on channels
Region Country Edges Frequencies Channel
Size PMP 450 (based on PMP
(MHz) Available Spacing
available 450 available
(MHz)
range) 22
range)
5 MHz 3302.5 – 3597.5 5900 60
Other 10 MHz 3300 – 3600 3305 – 3595 50 kHz 5800 30
20 MHz 3310 – 3590 5600 15
Other
5 MHz 3402.5 – 3597.5 3900 40
Other - ETSI (Any
country that follows 10 MHz 3400 – 3600 3405 – 3595 50 kHz 3800 20
ETSI rules)
20 MHz 3410 – 3590 3600 10
5 MHz 3302.5 – 3397.5 1900 20
China 10 MHz 3300 – 3400 3305 – 3395 50 kHz 1800 10
20 MHz 3310 – 3390 1600 5
5 MHz 3302.5 – 3597.5 5900 60
Asia India 10 MHz 3300 – 3600 3305 – 3595 50 kHz 5800 30
20 MHz 3310 – 3590 5600 15
5 MHz 3302.5 – 3397.5 1900 20
Indonesia 10 MHz 3300 – 3400 3305 – 3395 50 kHz 1800 10
20 MHz 3310 – 3390 1600 5
5 MHz 3302.5 – 3597.5 5900 60
Oceania Australia 10 MHz 3300 – 3600 3305 – 3595 50 kHz 5800 30
20 MHz 3310 – 3590 5600 15
5 MHz 3450 -365023 3452.5 – 3647.5 3900 40
(3475-3650
Canada 10 MHz for new 3455 – 3645 50 kHz 3800 20
deployments
North 20 MHz ) 3460 – 3640 3600 10
America 5 MHz 3302.5 – 3597.5 5900 60
Mexico 10 MHz 3300 – 3600 3305 – 3595 50 kHz 5800 30
20 MHz 3310 – 3590 5600 15
Europe (Denmark,
Finland, France,
Germany, Greece,
Iceland, Ireland,
Europe Italy, Liechtenstein, 5 MHz 3400 – 3600 3402.5 – 3597.5 50 kHz 3900 40
Norway, Portugal,
Serbia, Spain,
Switzerland, United
Kingdom)
10 MHz 3405 – 3595 3800 20

20 MHz 3410 – 3590 3600 10

22
With Adjacent Channel Support enabled on the AP (located in tab Configuration->Radio)
23
As of System Release 13.0, 3600 MHz is the upper limit. Range may be extended in a future release.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-23


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 73 AP Default combined Tx power per Country Code and Channel Bandwidth, 3.5
GHz.

Combined

Combined

Combined
Country Antenna Device Country

AP EIRP

AP EIRP

AP EIRP
Default

Default

Default
Setting
Gain Code Setting

Limit

Limit

Limit
(dBi) (Level 2)

TX

TX

TX
5 MHz Channel 10 MHz Channel 20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm)

Australia 17 23 57 23 60 23 63 Australia

Canada 17 23 62 23 62 23 62 Canada

China 17 23 N/A 23 N/A 23 N/A China

Denmark 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Denmark

Finland 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Finland

France 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 France

Germany 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Germany

India 17 23 N/A 23 N/A 23 N/A India

Iceland 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Iceland

Indonesia 17 23 N/A 23 N/A 23 N/A Indonesia

Ireland 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Ireland

Italy 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Italy

Mexico 17 23 N/A 23 N/A 23 N/A Mexico

Norway 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Norway

Portugal 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Portugal

Spain 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Spain

Switzerland 17 23 60 23 63 23 66 Switzerland

4-24 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 74 Center channel details based on Country Code, 3.6 GHz

# of Center # of Non-
Range of overlapping
Channels
Band Center Center center channels
Channel (based on
Region Country Edges Frequencies Channel (based on PMP
Size PMP 450
(MHz) Available Spacing 450 available
available
(MHz) 24
range) range)
5 MHz 3552.5 – 3797.5 4900 50
Other 10 MHz 3550 – 3800 3555 – 3795 50 kHz 4800 25
20 MHz 3560 – 3790 4600 12
5 MHz 3552.5 – 3797.5 4900 50
Other - ETSI (Any
Other country that follows 10 MHz 3550 – 3800 3555 – 3795 50 kHz 4800 25
ETSI rules)
20 MHz 3560 – 3790 4600 12
5 MHz 3652.5 – 3697.5 900 10
Other – FCC (Any
non-US country that 10 MHz 3650 – 3700 3655 – 3695 50 kHz 800 5
follows FCC rules)
20 MHz 3660 – 3690 600 2
5 MHz 3552.5 – 3797.5 4900 50
India 10 MHz 3550 – 3800 3555 – 3795 50 kHz 4800 25
20 MHz 3560 – 3790 4600 12
Asia
5 MHz 3602.5 – 3797.5 3900 40
Indonesia 10 MHz 3600 – 3800 3605 – 3795 50 kHz 3800 20
20 MHz 3610 – 3790 3600 10
5 MHz 3502.5 – 3797.5 5900 60
Oceania Australia 10 MHz 3500 – 3800 3505 – 3795 50 kHz 5800 30
20 MHz 3510 – 3790 5600 15
5 MHz 3652.5 – 3697.5 900 10
Canada 10 MHz 3650 – 3700 3655 – 3695 50 kHz 800 5
20 MHz 3660 – 3690 600 2
5 MHz 3552.5 – 3747.5 3900 40
North
Mexico 10 MHz 3550 – 3750 3555 – 3745 50 kHz 3800 20
America
20 MHz 3560 – 3740 3600 10
5 MHz 3652.5 – 3697.5 900 10
United States 10 MHz 3650 – 3700 3655 – 3695 50 kHz 800 5
20 MHz 3660 – 3690 600 2

Europe (Denmark,
Finland, France, 5 MHz 3552.5 – 3797.5 4900 50
Germany, Greece,
Iceland, Ireland, Italy,
Europe Liechtenstein, 10 MHz 3550 – 3800 3555 – 3795 50 kHz 4800 25
Norway, Portugal,
Serbia, Spain,
Switzerland, United 20 MHz 3560 – 3790 4600 12
Kingdom)

24
With Adjacent Channel Support enabled on the AP (located in tab Configuration->Radio)

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-25


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 75 AP Default combined Tx power per Country Code and Channel Bandwidth, 3.6
GHz.

Combined

Combined

Combined
Country Antenna Device Country

AP EIRP

AP EIRP

AP EIRP
Default

Default

Default
Setting
Gain (dBi) Code Setting

Limit

Limit

Limit
(Level 2)

TX

TX

TX
5 MHz Channel 10 MHz Channel 20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm)

Australia 17 25 N/A 25 N/A 25 N/A Australia

Canada 17 19 37 22 40 25 43 Canada

Denmark 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Denmark

Finland 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Finland

France 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 France

Germany 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Germany

Greece 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Greece

India 17 25 N/A 25 N/A 25 N/A India

Indonesia 17 25 N/A 25 N/A 25 N/A Indonesia

Ireland 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Ireland

Italy 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Italy

Liechtenstein 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Liechtenstein

Mexico 17 25 N/A 25 N/A 25 N/A Mexico

Norway 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Norway

Portugal 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Portugal

Serbia 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Serbia

Spain 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Spain

Switzerland 17 25 60 25 63 25 66 Switzerland

United 25 25 25
17 60 63 66 United Kingdom
Kingdom

United States 17 19 37 22 40 25 43 United States

4-26 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 76 Center channel details based on Country Code, 2.4 GHz

# of Non-
# of
overlapping
Range of Center
center
Band Center Center Channels
OFDM Radio Channel channels
Country Edges Frequencies Channel (based on
Model Size (based on
(MHz) Available Spacing PMP 450
PMP 450
(MHz)25 available
available
range)
range)

5 MHz 2402.5 – 2475 30 15


PMP 450
Series AP, 2.4- 10 MHz 2405 – 2470 27 7
GHz
20 MHz 2417.5– 2460 18 3

United 5 MHz 2402.5 – 2475 30 15


PMP 450
States,
Series SM, 2400-
Canada, 2.5 MHz 7
2.4-GHz, 10 MHz 2483.5 2405 – 2470 27
Other-
internal Patch
FCC
Antenna
20 MHz 2417.5– 2460 18 3

PMP 450 5 MHz 2407.5 – 2465 24 12


Series SM,
10 MHz 2420 – 2450 13 4
2.4-GHz, Dish
Antenna 20 MHz 2430 – 2445 7 1

For each edge frequency, transmit power must be reduced by 3 dB.

25
For each edge frequency, transmit power must be reduced by 3 dB.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-27


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 77 AP Default combined Tx power per Country Code and Band Edge Path Max TX
Detail, 2.4 GHz.

Country Ant. Gain Comb. AP Comb. TX AP Comb. AP Device


(dBi) TX EIRP Default EIRP TX EIRP Country
(18 dBi – Default Limit Setting Limit Default Limit Code
1dB cable Setting Setting Setting
loss) 5 MHz Channel 10 MHz Channel 20 MHz Channel
Bandwidth Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth
(dBm) (dBm)

Canada 17 19 36 19 36 19 36 Canada

United 17 19 36 19 36 19 36 United States


States
Lower Band Edge Path A Max TX Path B Max TX
Frequency (MHz) Power Power

AP
5 MHz 2402.5 16 16
10 MHz 2405 15 14
20 MHz 2417.5 15 15

SM
5 MHz 2402.5 15 15
10 MHz 2405 15 15
20 MHz 2417.5 18 18
Upper Band Edge Path A Max TX Path B Max TX
Frequency (MHz) Power Power

AP
5 MHz 2475 16 16
10 MHz 2470 15 14
20 MHz 2460 15 15

SM
5 MHz 2475 15 15
10 MHz 2470 15 15
20 MHz 2460 18 18

4-28 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 78 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.4 GHz

Region Country # of Non-


Code Code # of Center overlapping
Range of
Channels center
Band Center Center
Channel (based on channels
Edges Frequencies Channel
Size PMP 450 (based on
Level 1 Level 2 (MHz) Available Spacing
available PMP 450
(MHz)
range) available
range)

5472.5 – 100 49
5 MHz
5722.5
5470 –
Any 2.5 MHz
10 MHz 5725 5475 – 5720 98 23

20 MHz 5480 – 5715 94 10

Other – FCC 5475 – 5595


10 MHz 74 16
(Any non-US 5470 – 5645 – 5720
Other country that 5600; 5650 2.5 MHz
follows FCC - 572526 5465 – 5490
20 MHz 66 6
rules) 5640 – 5715

5475 – 5595
Other-ETSI 10 MHz 74 16
5470 – 5645 – 5720
(Any country
5600; 5650 2.5 MHz
that follows 5465 – 5490
- 572526
ETSI rules) 20 MHz 66 6
5640 – 5715

5475 – 5595
10 MHz 74 16
5470 – 5645 – 5720
Oceania Australia 5600; 5650 2.5 MHz
- 572526 5465 – 5490
20 MHz 66 6
5640 – 5715

5475 – 5595
10 MHz 74 16
5470 – 5645 – 5720
North
Canada 5600; 5650 2.5 MHz
America 5465 – 5490
- 572526
20 MHz 66 6
5640 – 5715

South 10 MHz 5470 – 5475 – 5720 98 23


Brazil 2.5 MHz
America 20 MHz 5725 5480 – 5715 94 10

10 MHz 5470 – 5475 – 5720 98 23


Asia Vietnam 2.5 MHz
20 MHz 5725 5480 – 5715 94 10

26
Frequencies 5600 – 5650 MHz are excluded, as ten minute Channel Availability Check is required

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-29


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Region Country # of Non-


Code Code # of Center overlapping
Range of
Channels center
Band Center Center
Channel (based on channels
Edges Frequencies Channel
Size PMP 450 (based on
Level 1 Level 2 (MHz) Available Spacing
available PMP 450
(MHz)
range) available
range)

5472.5 – 50 24
5 MHz
5597.5
5470 –
Africa Algeria 2.5 MHz
10 MHz 5600 5475 – 5595 48 11

20 MHz 5465 – 5490 44 4

Europe
(Denmark,
Finland,
5475 – 5595
France, 10 MHz 74 16
5645 – 5720
Germany,
Greece,
Iceland, 5470 –
Europe Ireland, Italy, 5600; 5650 2.5 MHz
Liechtenstein, - 572527
Norway,
Portugal, 5465 – 5490
Serbia, Spain, 20 MHz 66 6
5640 – 5715
Switzerland,
United
Kingdom)

27
Frequencies 5600 – 5650 MHz are excluded, as ten minute Channel Availability Check is required

4-30 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 79 Center channel details based on Country Code, 5.8 GHz

FDM Country Channel Band Edges Range of Center # of Center # of Non-


Radio Size (MHz) Center Channel Channels overlapping
Model Frequencies Spacing (based on center
Available PMP 450 channels
(MHz) available (based on
range, PMP 450
weather available
notch-out) range)

Denmark, 10
5730 – 5790;
Norway, 10 MHz 37
5725 – 5795; 5820 – 5845
United
5815 – 5850
Kingdom, 5735 – 5785; 4
Finland 20 MHz 29
5825 – 5840

10 MHz 5760 – 5870 45 12


Germany 5755 – 5875;
20 MHz 5765 – 5865 41 6

5730- 5790; 10
10 MHz 39
5725 – 5795; 5820 – 5850
Spain
5815 – 5855 5735 – 5785; 4
20 MHz 31
5825 – 5845

10 MHz 5730 – 5790 25 7


PMP Greece 5725 – 5795
450 20 MHz 5735 – 5785 21 3
Series
Portugal, 10 MHz 5730 – 5870 2.5 MHz 57 15
AP,
Iceland, 5725 – 5875
5.8- 20 MHz 5735 – 5865 53 7
Serbia
GHz
5730 – 5790; 12
10 MHz 47
Switzerland, 5725 – 5795; 5820 – 5870
Liechtenstein 5815 – 5875 5735 – 5785; 5
20 MHz 39
5825 – 5865

5727.5 – 25
5 MHz 49
5847.5
Australia 5725 - 5850
10 MHz 5730 – 5845 47 12

20 MHz 5735 – 5840 43 6

5 MHz 5730 - 5845 24


Canada, 47
United 10 MHz 5725 - 5850 5730 – 5845 12
States
20 MHz 5735 – 5845 45 6

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-31


PMP 450 Planning Guide

5827.5 – 10
5 MHz 19
5872.5
India 5825 – 5875
10 MHz 5830 - 5870 17 5

20 MHz 5835 - 5865 13 2

5727.5 – 25
5 MHz 49
5847.5
Brazil,
5725 – 5850
Vietnam 10 MHz 5730 – 5845 47 12

20 MHz 5735 - 5840 43 6

5727.5 – 20
5 MHz 39
5822.5

10 MHz 5730 – 5820 37 10

5
Indonesia 5725 - 5825

5735 - 5815 33

20 MHz

4-32 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 80 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.4 GHz band

Antenna Combined Combined


AP EIRP AP EIRP
Gain TX Default TX Default
Limit Limit Device
(dBi) Setting Setting
Country Country
(18 dBi –
10 MHz Channel 20 MHz Channel Code Setting
1dB cable
Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm)
loss)

United States, United States,


17 10 27 13 30
Canada Canada

Brazil 17 10 27 13 30 Brazil

Algeria 17 13 30 13 30 Algeria

Australia 17 10 27 13 30 Australia

Austria, Belgium,
Bosnia &
Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Croatia,
Cyprus, Czech
Republic, France,
, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, 17 10 2728 13 30 Other-ETSI
Latvia, Lithuania,
Luxembourg,
Macedonia, Malta,
Netherlands,
Poland, Romania,
Slovakia,
Slovenia , Sweden

Denmark 17 10 27 13 30 Denmark

Finland 17 10 27 13 30 Finland

Germany 17 10 27 13 30 Germany

Greece 17 10 27 13 30 Greece

Liechtenstein 17 10 27 13 30 Liechtenstein

Norway 17 10 27 13 30 Norway

Portugal 17 10 27 13 30 Portugal

Spain 17 10 27 13 30 Spain

28
At 5.4 GHz, EU regulations are harmonized. 5600 – 5650 MHz excluded, as ten minute Channel
Availability Check (CAC) is required

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-33


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Antenna Combined Combined


AP EIRP AP EIRP
Gain TX Default TX Default
Limit Limit Device
(dBi) Setting Setting
Country Country
(18 dBi –
10 MHz Channel 20 MHz Channel Code Setting
1dB cable
Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm)
loss)

United
United Kingdom 17 10 27 13 30
Kingdom

Vietnam 17 10 27 13 30 Vietnam

No EIRP /
No EIRP /
Conducte
Other 17 19 Conducted 19 Other
d power
power limit
limit

4-34 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Table 81 Default combined transmit power per Country Code – 5.8 GHz band

Country Antenna Device

Combined

Combined

Combined
AP EIRP

AP EIRP

AP EIRP
Default

Default

Default
Setting

Setting

Setting
Gain Country

Limit

Limit

Limit
(dBi) Code

TX

TX

TX
(18 dBi – Setting
1dB cable 5 MHz 10 MHz Channel 20 MHz Channel
loss) Channel Bandwidth (dBm) Bandwidth (dBm)
Bandwidth
(dBm)

Australia 17 19 36 19 36 19 36 Australia

Brazil 17 7 24 10 27 13 30 Brazil

Canada 17 9 26 19 36 19 36 Canada

Denmark 17 16 33 19 36 Denmark

Finland 17 16 33 19 36 Finland

Germany 17 16 33 19 36 Germany

Greece 17 16 33 19 36 Greece

India 17 19 36 19 36 19 36 India

Iceland 17 16 33 19 36 Iceland

Indonesia 17 13 30 19 36 19 36 Indonesia

Ireland 17 13 30 16 33 Ireland

Liechtenst Liechtens
17 16 33 19 36
ein tein

Norway 17 16 33 19 36 Norway

Portugal 17 16 33 19 36 Portugal

Serbia 17 16 33 19 36 Serbia

Spain 17 16 33 19 36 Spain

Switzerlan Switzerla
17 16 33 19 36
d nd

United United
17 16 33 19 36
Kingdom Kingdom

United United
17 19 36 19 36 19 36
States States

Vietnam 17 7 24 10 27 13 30 Vietnam

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-35


PMP 450 Planning Guide

After an AP with DFS is powered on it performs a channel availability check on its main
carrier frequency for 1 minute, monitoring for the radar signature without transmitting. If
no radar signature is detected during this minute, the module then proceeds to normal
beacon transmit mode. If it does detect a radar signature, the frequency is marked for a 30
minute non-occupancy period, and the module moves to its 1st alternate carrier frequency.
The AP continues this behavior through its 2nd alternate frequency if needed and then
waits until the first frequency ends the 30 minute non-occupancy period. While operating,
if the AP detects a weather radar signature it marks the current carrier frequency for a 30
minute non-occupancy period and moves to check the next-in-line carrier frequency.
SM does not begin transmission until it detects a beacon from an AP. If APs are not
transmitting, SMs are silent.
Europe applies the ETSI specification to both APs and SMs, while Brazil applies it only to
APs. In the ETSI case, when a SM is powered on, it scans to find a Canopy beacon from a
AP. If an AP is found, the SM performs a channel availability check on that frequency for 1
minute, monitoring for the radar signature, without transmitting. A DFS decision is made
based on the following:
 If no radar pulse is detected during this 1 minute, the SM proceeds through normal
steps to register to an AP.
 If the SM does detect radar, it locks out that frequency for 30 minutes and continues
scanning other frequencies in its scan list.
After a SM with DFS has seen a radar signature on a frequency and locked out that
frequency, it may connect to a different AP if color codes, AP transmitting frequencies, and
SM scanned frequencies support that connection.
To simplify operation and ensure compliance, a SM takes on the DFS type of the AP to
which it registers. For example, when a SM in Europe registers to an AP with the Country
Code set to “United Kingdom”, that SM will use ETSI DFS, no matter what its Country
Code is set to, even if its Country Code is set to “None”. Note, the operator must still
configure the Country Code in the SM correctly, as future releases may use the Country
Code for additional region-specific options.
For all modules running DFS, the module displays its DFS state on its Home => General
Status page as one of the following:
 Checking Channel Availability Remaining time n seconds, where n counts down from 60 to
1.
 Normal Transmit
 Radar Detected Stop Transmitting for n minutes, where n counts down from 30 to 1.
 Idle, only for SM/BHS, indicates module is scanning, but has not detected a beacon from an
AP/BHM. Once it detects beacon, the SM/BHS begins a Channel Availability Check on that
frequency.

Regulatory Note: A PMP 450 Series AP with a Country Code set to United States is not
be configurable to another Country Code by installers or end users. This is in response to
FCC KDB 594280 and ensures that end users and professional installers do not have
access to settings which could allow a radio to be configured to operate in a manner other
than that which was specified in the FCC equipment authorization grant.

4-36 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Within the United States and its territories the PMP 450 Country Code is pre-configured to
United States and not selectable in the Configuration, General web page. Radios sold in
regions outside of the United States and its territories are required to set the Country
Code to the region in which it is used.

FCC compliance testing


With GPS synchronization installed, the system has been tested for compliance to US
(FCC) specifications. It has been shown to comply with the limits for emitted spurious
radiation for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules in the USA.
These limits have been designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference. However the equipment can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
other radio communications. There is no guarantee that interference does not occur in a
particular installation.

A Class B Digital Device is a device that is marketed for use in a residential environment,
notwithstanding use in commercial, business and industrial environments.

Notwithstanding that Cambium has designed (and qualified) the PMP 450 products to
generally meet the Class B requirement to minimize the potential for interference, the
PMP 450 product range is not marketed for use in a residential environment.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-37


PMP 450 Planning Guide

FCC and ICC IDs and certification numbers


Table 82 US FCC IDs and Industry Canada Certification Numbers and Covered
Configurations

FCC ID Industry Module Frequencies Antenna Maximum


Canada Families (OFDM) Combined
Cert Tx Output
Number Power

20 MHz channels, centered


on 2417.5 – 2460 in 2.5
MHz increments (within the
2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM
band)

10 MHz channels, centered


PMP 450
Z8H89FT00 109W- on 2405 – 2470 in 2.5 MHz 17 dBi
AP 2.4- 19 dBm
04 0004 increments (within the 2400 Connectorized
GHz
– 2483.5 MHz ISM band)

5 MHz channels, centered


on 2402.5 – 2475 in 2.5
MHz increments (within the
2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM
band)

20 MHz channels, centered


on 3460 – 3640 in 50 kHz
increments (within the 3300
– 3600 MHz ISM band)

10 MHz channels, centered


PMP 450
109W- on 3455 – 3645 in 50 kHz 17 dBi
AP 3.5- 25 dBm
0008 increments (within the 3300 Connectorized
GHz
– 3600 MHz ISM band)

5 MHz channels, centered


on 3452.5 -3647.5 in 50 kHz
increments (within the 3300
– 3600 MHz ISM band)

4-38 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

FCC ID Industry Module Frequencies Antenna Maximum


Canada Families (OFDM) Combined
Cert Tx Output
Number Power

20 MHz channels, centered


on 3660 – 3690 in 50 kHz
25 dBm
increments (within the 3550
– 3800 MHz ISM band)

10 MHz channels, centered


PMP 450
Z8H89FT00 109W- on 3655 – 3695 in 50 kHz 17 dBi
AP 3.6- 22 dBm
10 0010 increments (within the 3550 Connectorized
GHz
– 3800 MHz ISM band)

5 MHz channels, centered


on 3652.5 -3697.5 in 50 kHz
19 dBm
increments (within the 3550
– 3800 MHz ISM band)

20 MHz channels, centered


on 5735-5840 in 2.5 MHz
increments (within the
5725-5850 MHz ISM band)

PMP 450 10 MHz channels, centered


Z8H89FT00 109W- 17 dBi
AP 5.8- on 5730-5845 in 2.5 MHz 19 dBm
02 0002 Connectorized
GHz increments (within the
5725-5850 MHz ISM band)

5 MHz channels, centered


on 5725-5850 in 2.5 MHz
increments (within the
5725-5850 MHz ISM band)

20 MHz channels, centered


on 5480 – 5590; 5660 –
PMP 450
Z8H89FT00 109W- 5715 in 2.5 MHz 17 dBi
AP 5.4- 13 dBm
02 0002 increments (within the 5470 Connectorized
GHz
– 5600; 5650 – 5725 MHz
UNII band)

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-39


PMP 450 Planning Guide

FCC ID Industry Module Frequencies Antenna Maximum


Canada Families (OFDM) Combined
Cert Tx Output
Number Power

10 MHz channels, centered


on 5475 – 5595; 5655 –
5720 in 2.5 MHz
10 dBm
increments (within the 5470
– 5600; 5650 – 5725 MHz
UNII band)

20 MHz channels, centered 7 dBi Integrated 19 dBm


on 2417.5 – 2460 in 2.5
MHz increments (within the 7 dBi Integrated
2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM with 12 dBi 17 dBm
band) Reflector Dish

10 MHz channels, centered 7 dBi Integrated 19 dBm


PMP 450
Z8H89FT00 109W- on 2405 – 2470 in 2.5 MHz 7 dBi Integrated
SM 2.4-
03 0003 increments (within the 2400 with 12 dBi 17 dBm
GHz
– 2483.5 MHz ISM band) Reflector Dish

5 MHz channels, centered 7 dBi Integrated 19 dBm


on 2402.5 – 2475 in 2.5
MHz increments (within the 7 dBi Integrated
2400 – 2483.5 MHz ISM with 12 dBi 17 dBm
band) Reflector Dish

20 MHz channels, centered 8 dBi Integrated 25 dBm


on 3460 – 3640 in 50 kHz
increments (within the 3300 8 dBi Integrated
– 3600 MHz ISM band) with 11 dBi 25 dBm
Reflector Dish

8 dBi Integrated 25 dBm


PMP 450 10 MHz channels, centered
109W-
SM 3.5- on 3455 – 3645 in 50 kHz 8 dBi Integrated
0007
GHz increments (within the 3300 with 11 dBi 25 dBm
– 3600 MHz ISM band) Reflector Dish

5 MHz channels, centered 8 dBi Integrated 25 dBm


on 3452.5 -3647.5 in 50 kHz 8 dBi Integrated
increments (within the 3300 with 11 dBi 25 dBm
– 3600 MHz ISM band) Reflector Dish

8 dBi Integrated 25 dBm

4-40 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

FCC ID Industry Module Frequencies Antenna Maximum


Canada Families (OFDM) Combined
Cert Tx Output
Number Power

20 MHz channels, centered


on 3560 – 3690 in 50 kHz 8 dBi Integrated
increments (within the 3550 with 11 dBi 25 dBm
– 3800 MHz ISM band) Reflector Dish

10 MHz channels, centered 8 dBi Integrated 22 dBm


PMP 450
Z8H89FT00 109W- on 3555 – 3695 in 50 kHz 8 dBi Integrated
SM 3.6-
09 0009 increments (within the 3550 with 11 dBi 22 dBm
GHz
– 3800 MHz ISM band) Reflector Dish

5 MHz channels, centered 8 dBi Integrated 19 dBm


on 3552.5 -3697.5 in 50 kHz
increments (within the 3550 8 dBi Integrated
– 3800 MHz ISM band) with 11 dBi 19 dBm
Reflector Dish

9 dBi Integrated

9 dBi Integrated
with 14 dBi
20 MHz channels, centered Reflector Dish
on 5735-5840 in 2.5 MHz
9 dBi Integrated 19 dBm
increments (within the
5725-5850 MHz ISM band) with 5.5 dBi
LENS

9 dBi Integrated
with 8 dBi CLIP
PMP 450
Z8H89FT00 109W- 9 dBi Integrated
SM 5.8-
01 0001
GHz 9 dBi Integrated
with 14 dBi
10 MHz channels, centered Reflector Dish
on 5730-5845 in 2.5 MHz
9 dBi Integrated 19 dBm
increments (within the
with 5.5 dBi
5725-5850 MHz ISM band)
LENS

9 dBi Integrated
with 8 dBi CLIP

9 dBi Integrated 19 dBm

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-41


PMP 450 Planning Guide

FCC ID Industry Module Frequencies Antenna Maximum


Canada Families (OFDM) Combined
Cert Tx Output
Number Power

9 dBi Integrated
with 14 dBi
Reflector Dish
5 MHz channels, centered
on 5725-5845 in 2.5 MHz 9 dBi Integrated
increments (within the with 5.5 dBi
5725-5850 MHz ISM band) LENS

9 dBi Integrated
with 8 dBi CLIP

9 dBi Integrated 11 dBm

20 MHz channels, centered 9 dBi Integrated


on 5480 – 5590; 5660 – with 14 dBi 7 dBm
5715 in 2.5 MHz Reflector Dish
increments (within the 5470 9 dBi Integrated
– 5600; 5650 – 5725 MHz with 5.5 dBi LENS 15 dBm
UNII band)
9 dBi Integrated
13 dBm
PMP 450 with 8 dBi CLIP
Z8H89FT0001 109W-0001 SM 5.4- 9 dBi Integrated 10 dBm
GHz
9 dBi Integrated
10 MHz channels, centered
with 14 dBi 4 dBm
on 5475 – 5595; 5655 –
Reflector Dish
5720 in 2.5 MHz
increments (within the 5470 9 dBi Integrated 12 dBm
– 5600; 5650 – 5725 MHz with 5.5 dBi LENS
UNII band)
9 dBi Integrated
10 dBm
with 8 dBi CLIP

4-42 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Listen Before Talk (FCC LBT) for 3.6 GHz Band


In the Unites States the 3650-3700 MHz band is licensed on a non-exclusive basis.
Operators have the responsibility to minimize the potential of interference to deployed
systems.

Standards
In FCC Part 90, Subpart Z29, the FCC requires that all systems implement a contention-
based protocol which may stop transmission if the system detects transmissions from other
systems. In Canada, the IC adopted the FCC’s definition of a contention-based protocol and
adopted the same requirements as the FCC30 in the 3650-3700 MHz band.
In FCC Part 90, Subpart Z two categories of contention-based protocols are defined:
restricted and un-restricted. A restricted contention-based protocol describes the ability to
detect interference from products of similar contention technology. An un-restricted
contention-based protocol describes the ability to detect interference from products with
dissimilar contention technology. Systems incorporating a restricted contention-based
protocol are allowed to operate in the lower 25 MHz of this frequency band (i.e. 3650-3675
MHz), while systems incorporating an un-restricted contention-based protocol are allowed
to use the full 50 MHz (i.e. 3650-3700MHz) of this frequency band. The 3.6 GHz PMP 450
operates over the full 50 MHz of this frequency band; and hence complies with the un-
restricted contention-based protocol solution.
Guidelines for FCC approval of devices operating in the 3650-3700 MHz band are provided
in a publication from the FCC Office of Engineering and Technology31. The guidance
addresses several questions to help determine the contention based protocol capability of a
device.

PMP 450 Compliance


The Listen Before Talk feature (hereafter referred to as LBT) is an AP requirement in the
3.6 band for North America and Canada. Currently the PMP 450 only supports DFS for the
Europe and ETSI regions. The Listen Before Talk feature is closely modelled after the
current implementation of DFS. The Access Point for the PMP 450 system uses a LBT
protocol that is embedded into a TDD/TDMA frame structure. Energy detection is done at a
regular time interval of once every 2.5 ms defined by the frame structure of the PMP 450
air interface.

29
FCC Title 47 of the Code of Federal Regulations Part 90 Subpart Z – Wireless Broadband Services in the
3650-3700 MHz Band
30
SP 3650 MHz – Spectrum Utilization Policy, Technical and Licensing Requirements for Wireless
Broadband Services (WBS) in the Band 3650-3700 MHz
31
FCC Office of Engineering and Technology Knowledge Database (KDB) Publication Number 552295 “CBP
Guidance for 3650-3700 Band v02r02”

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-43


PMP 450 Planning Guide

The system will use a fixed time interval at the end of the receive portion of each frame for
sensing energy present in the channel on both MIMO paths. The sensed energy is
measured and stored as a running average and compared to a pre-determined detection
threshold. When the average energy exceeds the detection threshold on either MIMO path,
the system will respond in such a way to cause the Access Point to cease transmission on
the current channel and switch to the next channel on its prioritized list of alternate
channel frequencies.

A channel availability check is performed over a pre-determined time interval on any


alternate channel before the Access Point is allowed to initiate transmission. If no alternate
channels are configured, the Access Point will wait a pre-determined channel back-off time
on the existing channel before attempting to initiate transmission. If the running average
of the energy sensed during the channel back-off time is below the detection threshold, the
Access Point is allowed to initiate transmission.

LBT detection threshold calculation


The energy detection threshold used for LBT is proportional to the maximum transmit
power of the transmitter. For a 23 dBm EIRP transmitter the detection threshold is:
 -73 dBm/MHz to receiver antenna (assuming 0 dBi) during input.
At start up the system monitors the channel frequency for 1 second before determining if
the channel is busy.
The detection threshold is proportional to the maximum transmit power of the transmitter.
The detection threshold is modified according to the following formula:

Detection Threshold (dBm)


= -73 dBm/MHz + 10log10(B) + 23 – PT + A

Where: Is:
B Monitored bandwidth in MHz
PT maximum transmit power in dBm
EIRP
A receive antenna gain in dBi
The receive antenna gain A is set equal to the external antenna gain. As part of the radio
configuration for LBT the operator must enter the maximum desired conducted power Pc,
the external antenna gain A and the channel bandwidth B. The PMP 450 Access Point will
ensure that the sum of the actual conducted power and the external antenna gain used to
calculate PT does not exceed the regulatory EIRP limit.

LBT operation of PMP 450 SM


Only the PMP 450 Access Point (AP) performs the threshold detection. The PMP 450
system employs a proprietary media access layer that utilizes a TDD/TDMA scheduled
transmission which is synchronously framed. The client PMP 450 Subscriber Module (SM)

4-44 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

cannot transmit data until it is allocated bandwidth from the AP. If the AP detects co-
channel signals, then the Access Point does not allocate any uplink data symbols to the
SM.
In this system, since permission to transmit is granted by the AP, there is no hidden node
problem like that experienced by purely contention based protocols (e.g. Wi-Fi using
CSMA/CA in the Distributed Coordination Function mode). The AP is typically installed in a
high location where it is most likely to receive co-channel interference and is most
susceptible to detection.

LBT on startup versus operational mode


The same energy detection method is performed by the PMP 450 AP whether it is in start-
up acquisition mode or operational mode. In start-up acquisition mode the Access Point
monitors the channel frequency for 1 second before determining if the channel is
unoccupied. In operational mode, if channel occupancy is detected and an alternate
channel frequency is configured, the AP switches to the alternate channel and monitors
that channel for 1 second before deciding if the channel is unoccupied. In operational
mode, if channel occupancy is detected and no alternate channel frequencies are
configured, the AP will cease transmission while continuing to monitor the existing
channel frequency for 2 seconds before determining if the channel is unoccupied.

Listen-Before-Talk (LBT) ETSI for the 5.4 GHz Band


The ETSI LBT feature is implemented in the 5.4 GHz band.
PMP 450 AP listens during the RTG (Receive/Transmit Transition Gap). If interference is
detected, the following frame is left empty, both the downlink and the uplink will be empty
for that frame.
The SM listens during the TTG (Transmit/receive Transition Gap) time. If interference is
detected, the SM also skips the whole UL frame, nothing is sent. The messages that are
not transmitted are handled as a regular retransmission at the AP side.
Figure 34 and Figure 35 show the LBT procedure for the AP and the SM.
Figure 34 LBT ETSI 5.4 GHz procedure for AP

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-45


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 35 LBT ETSI 5.4 GHz procedure for SM

Every time an LBT event is detected in the device, the event is reported to SW. SW
counts the number of events in a window (the algorithm for ETSI LBT counts events in a
100 frame window), and displays a message if the count exceeds a predefined threshold
(for ETSI LBT the threshold is 90 events in 100 frames).
The operator is allowed to select an alternate frequency, when configuring the device. If
the LBT event count exceeds the threshold, and the operator has selected an alternate
frequency, SW will switch to the alternate frequency.

LBT Status
The current LBT Status and LBT Threshold are displayed on the AP under the Home =>
General page.

4-46 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 36 LBT ETSI 5.4 GHz AP configuration

The table summarizes all possible status messages this parameter might display:

Table 83 LBT Status for ETSI 5.4 GHz


LBT Status Messages Definition

Normal Transmit Channel interference has not been detected.


Interference Detected, Channel interference has been detected and the AP
Stop Transmitting is no longer transmitting.
Preparing for Transmit Initialization required before the Channel
Availability Check.
Checking Channel Currently listening to the receive power levels to
Availability detect if there is any other channels broadcasting on
this frequency.
Idle LBT is not currently running.

Configuring Alternate Channel Frequencies for LBT 5.4 GHz


The alternate channels can be configured on the AP (under the tab Configuration =>
Radio). Same channel cannot be configured twice for Frequency Carrier, Alternate
Channel 1 or 2.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-47


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Figure 37 LBT AP configuration for 5.4 GHz

In order to enable LBT, the Regional and Country will have to be configured for an “Other
Regulatory/Other ETSI” or “Europe” followed by County that supports the ETSI standard. This
setting is available under Regional Settings tab of Configuration > General page.

Figure 38 LBT ETSI 5.4 GHz AP Region and Country Code

4-48 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Notifications
This section contains notifications of compliance with the radio regulations that are
enforced in various regions.

PMP 450 regulatory compliance


The PMP 450 complies with the regulations that are enforced in the USA and Canada. The
relevant notifications are specified in this section.

PMP 450 FCC and IC notification


U.S. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) and Industry Canada (IC) Notification.
This system has achieved Type Approval in various countries around the world. This means
that the system has been tested against various local technical regulations and found to
comply. The frequency band in which the system operates is ‘license exempt’ and the
system is allowed to be used provided it does not cause interference. The licensing
authority does not guarantee protection against interference from other products and
installations.
This device complies with part 15 of the US FCC Rules and Regulations and with RSS-210
of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. In Canada, users
must be cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users
(meaning they have priority) of the 5650 – 5850 MHz spectrum and these radars could
cause interference and/or damage to license-exempt local area networks (LELAN).
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1)
l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en
compromettre le fonctionnement.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an
antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry
Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its
gain must be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP) is not more
than that necessary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d'Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur radio peut
fonctionner avec une antenne d'un type et d'un gain maximal (ou inférieur) approuvé pour
l'émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de réduire les risques de brouillage
radioélectrique à l'intention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d'antenne et son
gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (PIRE) ne dépasse pas
l'intensité nécessaire à l'établissement d'une communication satisfaisante.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-49


PMP 450 Planning Guide

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the US FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in
a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with these instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment on and off, the user is encouraged to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
 Increase the separation between the affected equipment and the unit;
 Connect the affected equipment to a power outlet on a different circuit from which the
receiver is connected to.
 Consult the dealer and/or experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Where necessary, the end user is responsible for obtaining any National licenses required
to operate this product and these must be obtained before using the product in any
particular country. Contact the appropriate national administrations for details on the
conditions of use for the bands in question and any exceptions that might apply.
This radio transmitter (identify the device by certification number, or model number if
Category II) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types
listed below with the maximum permissible gain and required antenna impedance for each
antenna type indicated. Antenna types not included in this list, having a gain greater than
the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
Le présent émetteur radio (identifier le dispositif par son numéro de certification ou son
numéro de modèle s'il fait partie du matériel de catégorie I) a été approuvé par Industrie
Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne énumérés ci-dessous et ayant un gain
admissible maximal et l'impédance requise pour chaque type d'antenne. Les types
d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste, ou dont le gain est supérieur au gain maximal
indiqué, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'émetteur.
Table 84 Industry Canada approved antenna list

Approved Antenna Description Input Impedance


Model

2.4 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 60


C024045D601A 50 Ω
Degree Sector

3 GHz Dual Slant Antenna for 90


C030045D901A 50 Ω
Degree Sector

5 GHz Antenna for 90 Degree


85009324001 50 Ω
Sector (V+H)

5 GHz Antenna for 60 Degree


85009325001 50 Ω
Sector (V+H)

4-50 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Equipment Disposal
Please do not dispose of Electronic and Electric
Waste Equipment or Electronic and Electric Accessories
(Disposal) with your household waste. In some countries or
of Electronic regions, collection systems have been set up to
and Electric
Equipment handle waste of electrical and electronic equipment.
In European Union countries, please contact your
local equipment supplier representative or service
center for information about the waste collection
system in your country.

European Union Notification for 5.4 and 5.8 GHz Product


The 5.4 and 5.8 GHz connectorized product is a two-way radio transceiver suitable for use
in Broadband Wireless Access System (WAS), Radio Local Area Network (RLAN), or Fixed
Wireless Access (FWA) systems. It is a Class 2 device and uses operating frequencies that
are not harmonized throughout the EU member states. The operator is responsible for
obtaining any national licenses required to operate this product and these must be
obtained before using the product in any particular country.
Hereby, Cambium declares that the 5.4 and 5.8 GHz product complies with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. The relevant
Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ec-
doc.

This equipment is marked to show compliance with the European


R&TTE directive 1999/5/EC.

Regulatory Requirements for CEPT Member States (www.cept.org)


When operated in accordance with the instructions for use, Cambium Wireless equipment
operating in the 5.4 GHz bands is compliant with CEPT Recommendation 70-03 Annex 3
for Wideband Data Transmission and HIPERLANs. For compliant operation in the 5.4 GHz
band, the transmit power (EIRP) from the integrated antenna or a connectorized antenna
shall be no more than 0.5 W (27 dBm).
For EU member states, RLAN equipment in the 5.4GHz bands is exempt from individual
licensing under Commission Recommendation 2003/203/EC. Contact the appropriate
national administrations for details on the conditions of use for the bands in question and
any exceptions that might apply. Also see www.ero.dk for further information.
10 MHz channels are used, centered on 5475 to 5595 and 5655 to 5715 in 5 MHz
increments. This is within the 5470 to 5725 MHz U-NII band with 5600 to 5650 MHz
excluded.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-51


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Cambium Radio equipment operating in the 5470 to 5725 MHz band are categorized as
“Class 1” devices within the EU in accordance with ECC DEC(04)08 and are “CE” marked

to show compliance with the European Radio & Telecommunications


Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) directive 1999/5/EC. The relevant Declaration of Conformity
can be found at http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ec_doc/.
A European Commission decision, implemented by Member States on 31 October 2005,
makes the frequency band 5470-5725 MHz available in all EU Member States for wireless
access systems. Under this decision, the designation of Canopy 5.4GHz products become
“Class 1 devices” and these do not require notification under article 6, section 4 of the
R&TTE Directive. Consequently, these 5.4GHz products are only marked with the

symbol and may be used in any member state.

UK Notification
The 5.8 GHz connectorized product has been notified for operation in the UK, and when
operated in accordance with instructions for use it is compliant with UK Interface
Requirement IR2007. For UK use, installations must conform to the requirements of
IR2007 in terms of EIRP spectral density against elevation profile above the local horizon
in order to protect Fixed Satellite Services. The frequency range 5795-5815 MHz is
assigned to Road Transport & Traffic Telematics (RTTT) in the U.K. and shall not be used
by FWA systems in order to protect RTTT devices. UK licensing specifies that radiolocation
services shall be protected by a Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) mechanism to prevent
co-channel operation in the presence of radar signals.

Brazil Notification
For compliant operation in the 5.4 GHz band, the Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power
from the integrated antenna or connectorized antenna shall not exceed 27 dBm (0.5 W).
The operator is responsible for enabling the DFS feature on any Canopy 5.4 GHz radio by
setting the Country Code to “Brazil”, including after the module is reset to factory
defaults.
Important Note: This equipment operates as a secondary application, so it has no rights
against harmful interference, even if generated by similar equipment, and cannot cause
harmful interference on systems operating as primary applications.

Luxembourg Notification
5.4GHz products can only be used for mobile services.

Czech Republic Notification


5.4 GHz products can be operated in accordance with the Czech General License
No. GL-30/R/2000.

4-52 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Italy Notification
In Italy, there is a regulation which requires a general authorization of any 5.4 GHz radio
link which is used outside the operator’s own premises. It is the responsibility of the
installer or operator to have the link authorized. Details may be found at:
http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/index.php?option=com_content&view=article&idme
nu=672&idarea1=593&andor=AND&idarea2=1052&id=68433&sectionid=1,16&viewTyp
e=1&showMenu=1&showCat=1&idarea3=0&andorcat=AND&partebassaType=0&idarea
Calendario1=0&MvediT=1&idarea4=0&showArchiveNewsBotton=0&directionidUser=0
The form to be used for general authorization may be found at:
http://www.sviluppoeconomico.gov.it/images/stories/mise_extra/Allegato%20n19.doc.

3.5 GHz and 3.6 GHz has been notified to all EU member states

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-53


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Appendix A: Glossary
Table 85 Glossary

Term Definition

10Base-T Technology in Ethernet communications that can deliver 10 Mb of


data across 328 feet (100 meters) of CAT 5 cable.

169.254.0.0 Gateway IP address default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband


IP network modules.

169.254.1.1 IP address default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP


network modules.

255.255.0.0 Subnet mask default in Cambium fixed wireless broadband IP


network modules and in Microsoft and Apple operating systems.

802.3 An IEEE standard that defines the contents of frames that are
transferred through Ethernet connections. Each of these frames
contains a preamble, the address to which the frame is sent, the
address that sends the frame, the length of the data to expect, the
data, and a checksum to validate that no contents were lost.

802.11 The IEEE standard for wireless local area networks.

802.15 The IEEE standard for wireless personal area networks.

Access Point Two to six Access Point Modules that together distribute network
Cluster or Internet services to a community of subscribers. Each Access
Point Module covers a 60° or 90° sector. This cluster covers as
much as 360°. Also known as AP cluster.

Access Point Also known as AP. One module that distributes network or Internet
Module services in a 60° or 90° sector.

ACT/4 Second-from-left LED in the module. In the operating mode, this


LED is lit when data activity is present on the Ethernet link.

Activate To provide feature capability to a module, but not to enable (turn


on) the feature in the module. See also Enable.

Address Protocol defined in RFC 826 to allow a network element to


Resolution correlate a host IP address to the Ethernet address of the host. See
Protocol http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc826.html.

Aggregate The sum of the throughputs in the uplink and the downlink.
Throughput

AP Access Point Module. One module that distributes network or


Internet services to subscriber modules.

4-54 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

APs MIB Management Information Base file that defines objects that are
specific to the Access Point Module. See also Management
Information Base.

ARP Address Resolution Protocol. A protocol defined in RFC 826 to


allow a network element to correlate a host IP address to the
Ethernet address of the host. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc826.html.

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One language. The format of the text files
that compose the Management Information Base.

Attenuation Reduction of signal strength caused by the travel from the


transmitter to the receiver, and caused by any object between. In
the absence of objects between, a signal that has a short
wavelength experiences a high degree of attenuation nevertheless.

BER Bit Error Rate. The ratio of incorrect data received to correct data
received.

Bit Error Rate Ratio of incorrect data received to correct data received.

Box MIB Management Information Base file that defines module-level


objects. See also Management Information Base.

Bridge Network element that uses the physical address (not the logical
address) of another to pass data. The bridge passes the data to
either the destination address, if found in the simple routing table,
or to all network segments other than the one that transmitted the
data. Modules are Layer 2 bridges except that, where NAT is
enabled for an SM, the SM is a Layer 3 switch. Compare to Switch
and Router, and see also NAT.

Bridge Entry Value that the operator sets as the maximum interval for no activity
Timeout Field with another module, whose MAC address is the Bridge Entry. This
interval should be longer than the ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol) cache timeout of the router that feeds the network.

Buckets Theoretical data repositories that can be filled at preset rates or


emptied when preset conditions are experienced, such as when
data is transferred.

Burst Preset amount limit of data that may be continuously transferred.

C/I Ratio Ratio of intended signal (carrier) to unintended signal


(interference) received.

Carrier-to- Ratio of intended reception to unintended reception.


interference
Ratio

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-55


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

CarSenseLost This field displays how many carrier sense lost errors occurred on
Field the Ethernet controller.

CAT 5 Cable Cable that delivers Ethernet communications from module to


module. Later modules auto-sense whether this cable is wired in a
straight-through or crossover scheme.

CIR Committed Information Rate. For an SM or specified group of


SMs, a level of bandwidth that can be guaranteed to never fall
below a specified minimum (unless oversubscribed). In the
Cambium implementation, this is controlled by the Low Priority
Uplink CIR, Low Priority Downlink CIR, High Priority Uplink CIR,
and High Priority Downlink CIR parameters.

CLIP Cassegrain Lens for Improved Performance

Cluster Module that provides power, GPS timing, and networking


Management connections for an AP cluster. Also known as CMM.
Module

CMM Cluster Management Module. A module that provides power, GPS


timing, and networking connections for an Access Point cluster.

CodePoint See DiffServ.

Color Code Field Module parameter that identifies the other modules with which
communication is allowed. The range of valid values is 0 to 255.

Community Control string that allows a network management station to access


String Field MIB information about the module.

Country Code A parameter that offers multiple fixed selections, each of which
automatically implements frequency band range restrictions for the
selected country. Units shipped to countries other than the United
States must be configured with the corresponding Region Code and
Country Code to comply with local regulatory requirements.

CRCError Field This field displays how many CRC errors occurred on the Ethernet
controller.

Data Encryption Over-the-air link option that uses secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity
Standard bits. Data Encryption Standard (DES) performs a series of bit
permutations, substitutions, and recombination operations on
blocks of data.

Demilitarized Internet Protocol area outside of a firewall. Defined in RFC 2647.


Zone See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2647.html.

4-56 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

DES Data Encryption Standard. An over-the-air link option that uses


secret 56-bit keys and 8 parity bits. DES performs a series of bit
permutations, substitutions, and recombination operations on
blocks of data.

Desensed Received an undesired signal that was strong enough to make the
module insensitive to the desired signal.

DFS See Dynamic Frequency Selection

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, defined in RFC 2131.


Protocol that enables a device to be assigned a new IP address and
TCP/IP parameters, including a default gateway, whenever the
device reboots. Thus DHCP reduces configuration time, conserves
IP addresses, and allows modules to be moved to a different
network within the system. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2131.html. See also Static IP Address
Assignment.

DiffServ Differentiated Services, consistent with RFC 2474. A byte in the


type of service (TOS) field of packets whose values correlates to the
channel on which the packet should be sent. The value is a numeric
code point. Cambium modules map each of 64 code points to values
of 0 through 7. Three of these code points have fixed values, and
the remaining 61 are settable. Values of 0 through 3 map to the
low-priority channel; 4 through 7 to the high-priority channel. The
mappings are the same as 802.1p VLAN priorities. (However,
configuring DiffServ does not automatically enable the VLAN
feature.) Among the settable parameters, the values are set in the
AP for all downlinks within the sector and in the SM for each
uplink.

Disable To turn off a feature in the module after both the feature activation
file has activated the module to use the feature and the operator
has enabled the feature in the module. See also Activate and
Enable.

DMZ Demilitarized Zone as defined in RFC 2647. An Internet Protocol


area outside of a firewall. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2647.html.

Dynamic A requirement in certain countries and regions for systems to


detect
Frequency interference from other systems, notably radar systems, and to
Selection avoid co-channel operation with these systems.
Dynamic Host See DHCP.
Configuration
Protocol

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-57


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

Electronic Serial Hardware address that the factory assigns to the module for
Number identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems
Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial
number. Same as MAC Address.

Enable To turn on a feature in the module after the feature activation file
has activated the module to use the feature. See also Activate.

ESN Electronic Serial Number. The hardware address that the factory
assigns to the module for identification in the Data Link layer
interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This
address serves as an electronic serial number. Same as MAC
Address.

EthBusErr Field This field displays how many Ethernet bus errors occurred on the
Ethernet controller.

Ethernet Any of several IEEE standards that define the contents of frames
Protocol that are transferred from one network element to another through
Ethernet connections.

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

Fade Margin The difference between strength of the received signal and the
strength that the receiver requires for maintaining a reliable link. A
higher fade margin is characteristic of a more reliable link.
Standard operating margin.

FCC Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.A.

Field- Array of logic, relational data, and wiring data that is factory
programmable programmed and can be reprogrammed.
Gate Array

File Transfer Utility that transfers of files through TCP (Transport Control
Protocol Protocol) between computing devices that do not operate on the
same platform. Defined in RFC 959. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc959.html.

FPGA Field-programmable Gate Array. An array of logic, relational data,


and wiring data that is factory programmed and can be
reprogrammed.

Frame Timing Toggle parameter that prevents or allows the module to continue to
Pulse Gated propagate GPS sync timing when the module no longer receives the
Field timing.

Free Space Path Signal attenuation that is naturally caused by atmospheric


Loss conditions and by the distance between the antenna and the
receiver.

4-58 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

Fresnel Zone Space in which no object should exist that can attenuate, diffract,
or reflect a transmitted signal before the signal reaches the target
receiver.

FTP File Transfer Protocol, defined in RFC 959. Utility that transfers of
files through TCP (Transport Control Protocol) between computing
devices that do not operate on the same platform. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc959.html.

Global Network of satellites that provides absolute time to networks on


Positioning earth, which use the time signal to synchronize transmission and
System reception cycles (to avoid interference) and to provide reference
for troubleshooting activities.

GPS Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that provides


absolute time to networks on earth, which use the time signal to
synchronize transmission and reception cycles (to avoid
interference) and to provide reference for troubleshooting
activities.

GPS/3 Third-from-left LED in the module. In the operating mode for an


Access Point Module, this LED is continuously lit as the module
receives sync pulse. In the operating mode for a Subscriber, this
LED flashes on and off to indicate that the module is not registered.

GUI Graphical user interface.

High-priority Channel that supports low-latency traffic (such as Voice over IP)
Channel over low-latency traffic (such as standard web traffic and file
downloads). To recognize the latency tolerance of traffic, this
channel reads the IPv4 Type of Service DiffServ Control Point
(DSCP) bits. Enabling the high-priority channel reduces the
maximum number of SMs that can be served in the sector.

HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol, used to make the Internet resources


available on the World Wide Web. Defined in RFC 2068. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2068.html.

HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure (HTTPS)

ICMP Internet Control Message Protocols defined in RFC 792, used to


identify Internet Protocol (IP)-level problems and to allow IP links
to be tested. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc792.html.

indiscards count How many inbound packets were discarded without errors that
Field would have prevented their delivery to a higher-layer protocol.
(Some of these packets may have been discarded to increase buffer
space.)

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-59


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

inerrors count How many inbound packets contained errors that prevented their
Field delivery to a higher-layer protocol.

innucastpkts How many inbound non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or


count Field subnetwork-multicast) packets were delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.

inoctets count How many octets were received on the interface, including those
Field that deliver framing information.

Intel A registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

inucastpkts How many inbound subnetwork-unicast packets were delivered to a


count Field higher-layer protocol.

inunknownprotos How many inbound packets were discarded because of an unknown


count Field or unsupported protocol.

IP Internet Protocol defined in RFC 791. The Network Layer in the


TCP/IP protocol stack. This protocol is applied to addressing,
routing, and delivering, and re-assembling data packets into the
Data Link layer of the protocol stack. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc791.html.

IP Address 32-bit binary number that identifies a network element by both


network and host. See also Subnet Mask.

IPv4 Traditional version of Internet Protocol, which defines 32-bit fields


for data transmission.

ISM Industrial, Scientific, and Medical Equipment radio frequency


band, in the 900-MHz, 2.4-GHz, and 5.8-GHz ranges.

L2TP over IPSec Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP Security. One of several virtual
private network (VPN) implementation schemes. Regardless of
whether Subscriber Modules have the Network Address
Translation feature (NAT) enabled, they support VPNs that are
based on this protocol.

Late Collision This field displays how many late collisions occurred on the
Field Ethernet controller. A normal collision occurs during the first 512
bits of the frame transmission. A collision that occurs after the first
512 bits is considered a late collision. A late collision is a serious
network problem because the frame being transmitted is
discarded. A late collision is most commonly caused by a mismatch
between duplex configurations at the ends of a link segment.

Latency Acceptable tolerance for delay in the transfer of data to and from a
Tolerance module.

4-60 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

LBT Listen Before Talk (LBT) or sometimes called Listen Before


Transmit is a technique used in radio communications whereby a
radio transmitters first sense its radio environment before it starts
a transmission.

Line of Sight Wireless path (not simply visual path) direct from module to
module. The path that results provides both ideal aim and an ideal
Fresnel zone.

LNK/5 Furthest left LED in the module. In the operating mode, this LED is
continuously lit when the Ethernet link is present. In the aiming
mode for a Subscriber Module, this LED is part of a bar graph that
indicates the quality of the RF link.

Logical Unit ID Final octet of the 4-octet IP address of the module.

LOS Line of sight. The wireless path (not simply visual path) direct from
module to module. The path that results provides both ideal aim
and an ideal Fresnel zone.

LUID Logical Unit ID. The final octet of the 4-octet IP address of the
module.

MAC Address Media Access Control address. The hardware address that the
factory assigns to the module for identification in the Data Link
layer interface of the Open Systems Interconnection system. This
address serves as an electronic serial number.

Management Space that allows a program (agent) in the network to relay


Information Base information to a network monitor about the status of defined
variables (objects).

Maximum The cap applied to the bandwidth of an SM or specified group of


Information Rate SMs. In the Cambium implementation, this is controlled by the
(MIR) Sustained Uplink Data Rate, Uplink Burst Allocation, Sustained
Downlink Data Rate, and Downlink Burst Allocation parameters.

Media Access Hardware address that the factory assigns to the module for
Control Address identification in the Data Link layer interface of the Open Systems
Interconnection system. This address serves as an electronic serial
number.

MIB Management Information Base. Space that allows a program


(agent) in the network to relay information to a network monitor
about the status of defined variables (objects).

MIR See Maximum Information Rate.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-61


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

NAT Network Address Translation defined in RFC 1631. A scheme that


isolates Subscriber Modules from the Internet. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html.

NEC National Electrical Code. The set of national wiring standards that
are enforced in the U.S.A.

NetBIOS Protocol defined in RFC 1001 and RFC 1002 to support an


applications programming interface in TCP/IP. This interface allows
a computer to transmit and receive data with another host
computer on the network. RFC 1001 defines the concepts and
methods. RFC 1002 defines the detailed specifications. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1001.html and
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1002.html.

Network Address Scheme that defines the Access Point Module as a proxy server to
Translation isolate registered Subscriber Modules from the Internet. Defined in
RFC 1631. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html.

Network See NMS.


Management
Station

NMS Network Management Station. A monitor device that uses Simple


Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to control, gather, and
report information about predefined network variables (objects).
See also Simple Network Management Protocol.

Object Network variable that is defined in the Management Information


Base.

outdiscards How many outbound packets were discarded without errors that
count Field would have prevented their transmission. (Some of these packets
may have been discarded to increase buffer space.)

outerrrors count How many outbound packets contained errors that prevented their
Field transmission.

outnucastpkts How many packets for which the higher-level protocols requested
count Field transmission to a non-unicast (subnetwork-broadcast or
subnetwork-multicast) address. The number includes those that
were discarded or not sent.

outoctets count How many octets were transmitted out of the interface, including
Field those that deliver framing information.

outucastpkts How many packets for which the higher-level protocols requested
count Field transmission to a subnetwork-unicast address. The number
includes those that were discarded or not sent.

4-62 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

Override Plug Device that enables the operator to regain control of a module that
has been locked by the No Remote Access feature, the 802.3 Link
Disable feature, or a password or IP address that cannot be
recalled. This device can be either fabricated on site or ordered.

PMP See Point-to-Multipoint Protocol.

Point-to- Defined in RFC 2178, which specifies that data that originates from
Multipoint a central network element can be received by all other network
Protocol elements, but data that originates from a non-central network
element can be received by only the central network element. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2178.html. Also referenced as PMP.

PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. Supported on SMs for


operators who use PPPoE in other parts of their network
operators who want to deploy PPPoE to realize per-subscriber
authentication, metrics, and usage control.

PPS Packet Per Second

PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol. One of several virtual private


network implementations. Regardless of whether the Network
Address Translation (NAT) feature enabled, Subscriber Modules
support VPNs that are based on this protocol.

Protective Earth Connection to earth (which has a charge of 0 volts). Also known as
ground.

Proxy Server Network computer that isolates another from the Internet. The
proxy server communicates for the other computer, and sends
replies to only the appropriate computer, which has an IP address
that is not unique or not registered.

PTMP See Point-to-Multipoint Protocol.

Quick Start Interface page that requires minimal configuration for initial
module operation.

Radio Signal Relative measure of the strength of a received signal. An


Strength acceptable link displays an Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
Indicator value of greater than 700.

Recharging Resumed accumulation of data in available data space (buckets).


See Buckets.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-63


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

Reflection Change of direction and reduction of amplitude of a signal that


encounters an object larger than the wavelength. Reflection may
cause an additional copy of the wavelength to arrive after the
original, unobstructed wavelength arrives. This causes partial
cancellation of the signal and may render the link unacceptable.
However, in some instances where the direct signal cannot be
received, the reflected copy may be received and render an
otherwise unacceptable link acceptable.

Region Code A parameter that offers multiple fixed selections, each of which
automatically implements frequency band range restrictions for
the selected region. Units shipped to regions other than the United
States must be configured with the corresponding Region Code to
comply with local regulatory requirements.

Registrations Management Information Base file that defines registrations for


MIB global items such as product identities and product components.
See also Management Information Base.

RetransLimitExp This field displays how many times the retransmit limit has expired.
Field

RF Radio frequency. How many times each second a cycle in the


antenna occurs, from positive to negative and back to positive
amplitude.

RJ-11 Standard cable that is typically used for telephone line or modem
connection.

RJ-45 Standard cable that is typically used for Ethernet connection. This
cable may be wired as straight-through or as crossover. Later
modules auto-sense whether the cable is straight-through or
crossover.

Router Network element that uses the logical (IP) address of another to
pass data to only the intended recipient. Compare to Switch and
Bridge.

RSSI Radio Signal Strength Indicator. A relative measure of the strength


of a received signal. An acceptable link displays an RSSI value of
greater than 700.

RTG Receive/Transmit Transition Gap. A gap between the uplink burst


and the subsequent downlink burst in a TDD transceiver. During
RTG, AP/BHM switches from receive to transmit mode and
SMs/BHS switch from transmit to receive mode.

RxBabErr Field This field displays how many receiver babble errors occurred.

4-64 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

RxOverrun Field This field displays how many receiver overrun errors occurred on
the Ethernet controller.

Secure Shell A trademark of SSH Communications Security.

Self-interference Interference with a module from another module in the same


network.

SES/2 Third-from-right LED in the module. In the Access Point Module,


this LED is unused. In the operating mode for a Subscriber Module,
this LED flashes on and off to indicate that the module is not
registered. In the aiming mode for a Subscriber Module, this LED
is part of a bar graph that indicates the quality of the RF link.

Simple Network Standard that is used for communications between a program


Management (agent) in the network and a network management station
Protocol (monitor). Defined in RFC 1157. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1157.html.

SM Customer premises equipment (CPE) device that extends network


or Internet services by communication with an Access Point
Module or an Access Point cluster.

SM MIB Management Information Base file that defines objects that are
specific to the Subscriber Module. See also Management
Information Base.

SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol, defined in RFC 1157.

SNMPv3 SNMP version 3

SNMP Trap Capture of information that informs the network monitor through
Simple Network Management Protocol of a monitored occurrence
in the module.

Static IP Address Assignment of Internet Protocol address that can be changed only
Assignment manually. Thus static IP address assignment requires more
configuration time and consumes more of the available IP
addresses than DHCP address assignment does. RFC 2050 provides
guidelines for the static allocation of IP addresses. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2050.html. See also DHCP.

Subnet Mask 32-bit binary number that filters an IP address to reveal what part
identifies the network and what part identifies the host. The
number of subnet mask bits that are set to 1 indicates how many
leading bits of the IP address identify the network. The number of
subnet mask bits that are set 0 indicate how many trailing bits of
the IP address identify the host.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-65


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

Subscriber Customer premises equipment (CPE) device that extends network


Module or Internet services by communication with an Access Point
Module or an Access Point cluster.

Sustained Data Preset rate limit of data transfer.


Rate

Switch Network element that uses the port that is associated with the
physical address of another to pass data to only the intended
recipient. Compare to Bridge and Router.

SYN/1 Second-from-right LED in the module. In the Access Point Module


or in a registered Subscriber, this LED is continuously lit to
indicate the presence of sync. In the operating mode for a
Subscriber Module, this LED flashes on and to indicate that the
module is not registered.

Sync GPS (Global Positioning System) absolute time, which is passed


from one module to another. Sync enables timing that prevents
modules from transmitting or receiving interference. Sync also
provides correlative time stamps for troubleshooting efforts.

TCP Alternatively known as Transmission Control Protocol or Transport


Control Protocol. The Transport Layer in the TCP/IP protocol stack.
This protocol is applied to assure that data packets arrive at the
target network element and to control the flow of data through the
Internet. Defined in RFC 793. See
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc793.html.

TDD Time Division Duplexing. Synchronized data transmission with


some time slots allocated to devices transmitting on the uplink and
some to the device transmitting on the downlink.

telnet Utility that allows a client computer to update a server. A firewall


can prevent the use of the telnet utility to breach the security of
the server. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc818.html,
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc854.html and
http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc855.html.

Textual Management Information Base file that defines system-specific


Conventions MIB textual conventions. See also Management Information Base.

Tokens Theoretical amounts of data. See also Buckets.

TOS 8-bit field in that prioritizes data in a IP transmission. See


http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1349.html.

4-66 pmp-0047 (August 2015)


PMP 450 Planning Guide

Term Definition

TTG Transmit/receive Transition Gap. A gap between the downlink burst


and the subsequent uplink burst in a TDD transceiver. During TTG,
AP/BHM switches from transmit to receive mode and SMs/BHS
switch from receive to transmit mode.

TxUnderrun This field displays how many transmission-underrun errors


Field occurred on the Ethernet controller.

UDP User Datagram Protocol. A set of Network, Transport, and Session


Layer protocols that RFC 768 defines. These protocols include
checksum and address information but does not retransmit data or
process any errors. See http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc768.html.

udp User-defined type of port.

U-NII Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure radio frequency


band, in the 5.1-GHz through 5.8-GHz ranges.

VID VLAN identifier. See also VLAN.

VLAN Virtual local area network. An association of devices through


software that contains broadcast traffic, as routers would, but in
the switch-level protocol.

VPN Virtual private network for communication over a public network.


One typical use is to connect remote employees, who are at home
or in a different city, to their corporate network over the Internet.
Any of several VPN implementation schemes is possible. SMs
support L2TP over IPSec (Level 2 Tunneling Protocol over IP
Security) VPNs and PPTP (Point to Point Tunneling Protocol) VPNs,
regardless of whether the Network Address Translation (NAT)
feature enabled.

pmp-0047 (August 2015) 4-67

You might also like